Buick 1998 Park Avenue Owners Manual Owner's

I

i

I

1:

I

:.

'.

..

.

..

,

1-1

2-

1

3-1

4-1

9-1

6-

1

9-

f

GENERAL

MOTORS,

GM,

the

GM

Emblem,

BUICK,

the

WLJIICK

Emblem and the name

PARK

AVENUE

are

registered trademarks

of

General Motors Corporation.

This

manual

includes the 'latest information at the time

it

WES

printed. We reserve the right

to

make changes

in

the

prc~duct after that time

without

Fmther

notice.

For

vehicles first

sold

in

Canada, substitute

the

name

"General Motors

of

Canada Limited" for hick

Motor

Division whenever

it

appears

in

this

manual.

Please keep

this

manual

in

your

vehicle,

so

it

wiIl

be

there

if

you

ever need

it

when you're

on

the

road.

if

you

sell

the

vehicle, please leave

this

manual

In

it

SO

the

new

owner

can

use

it.

1

We

support

vslunta~y

technician certification.

WE

SUPPORT

VOLUNTARY

TECHNICIAN

CERTIFICATION THROUGH

Natlonal

Institute

for

AUTOMOTIVE

SERVICE

EXCELLENCE

Aux

propriktaires

canadiens:

Vous

pouvez

VOES

procurer

un

exernpiaire de

ce

guide en franc;ais chez

votre concessionaire

ou

au:

DGN

Marketing Services

Lad.

1577

Meyerside

Dr.

Mississauga,

Ontario

L5T

IB9

9

Copyright General Motors Corporation

1997

All

Rights

Reserved

I

Many

people read their owner’s manual

from

beginning

to end when they first receive their new vehicle.

If

you do

this,

it

will

help

you

learn about

the

features

and controls for

your

vehicle.

In

this

manual,

you’ll

find that pictures and words work together to explain

things quickly.

A

good place to

look

for

what you need is the Index in

back

of

the manual.

It’s

an

alphabetical list of what’s

in

the manual, and the page number’where you’ll find

it.

You

will find

a

number

of

safety cautions

in

~s

book.

We use a box and the word

CAUTION

to tell

you

about

things

that could hurt you

if

you

were

to

ignore

the

warning.

In

the caution area, we tell

YOU

what the hazard is. Then

we tell

you

what to

do

to help avoid

or

reduce

the

.

hazard. Please read these cautions.

If

YOU

don’t,

you

or

others could be

hurt.

You

will

also

find

a

circle

with a slash through it

in

this

book.

This safety

symbol

means “Don’t,’’

“Don’t

do

this”

OH

“Don’t

let this happen.”

Also,

in

this

book

YOU

will

Eind

these notices:

In

the

notice area,

we

tell

you

about

somefling

that

can

damage

your

vehicle. Many times,

this

damage would

not

be

covered

by

your

warranty,

and

it

could be

costly.

But

the notice

will

tell

you

what

to

di~

to

kelp

avoid

the

damage.

When

you

read other

manuals,

you

might

see

CAUTION

and

NOTICE

warnings

in

different

colors

3r

in different

words.

You’ll

also

see waxing

Babels

on

your

vehicle. They

use

the same

words,

CAUTION

oh:

NOTICE.

CAUSPlC

BURNS

SPARK

OR

ql!,

COULD

FUME

EXPLODE

BATTERY

I

F

1

:

f

I

1

These

symbols

are

important

for

you

and

your passengers

whenever your

vehicle

is

driver.:

DOOR

LOCK

UNLOCK

POWER

WINDOW

These

symbols

have

to

do

with

your

lamps:

I.

These

symbols

i

These

symbols

are

on

some

of

'

are

used

OR

your

controls:

wming

and

[

indicator

lights:

i

WEWTkATIMG

FAN

BRAKE

ANTI-LOCK

(e)

BRAKES

Here

xe

some

other

symbols

you

may

see:

SPEAKER

FUEL

Here you'll find information about the seats in ycur

Buick

and

how

to

use

your safety belts propedy.

You

can

also

learn

about

some

things you should

not

do

with

air bags

and

safety belts.

1-2

1-8

1-12

1-13

1-20

1-21

1-28

B

-27

Seats

and

Seat

Controls

Safety Belts: They're

for

Everyone

Were

Are

Questions Many Teogle

Ask

About

Safety Belts

--

and

the

Answers

How

to

Wear Safety Belts Properly

Driver

Position

Safety Beit Use During Pregnancy

Right

Front

Passenger Position

Supplenental Restraint System

(SRS)

Center Passenger Position

1-28

1-32

1-34

1-37

1-47

9

-50

i

-50

1-50

Rear

Seat Passengers

Rear Safety Belt

CSITI€OI-~

Guides for

Children

and

Small

Adults

Children

Child

Restraints

Larger Children

Safety

Belt Extender

Checking Your

Restraint

Systems

Replacing Restraint System

Parts

After

a

Crash

'This

part

tells

YQU

about

the

seats

--

how

to

adjust them,

and

SO

about

memory

seats, reclining seatbacks and

head restraints.

To

increase

or

decrease

supp~pt,

hold

the

switch

forward

or

rearward.

TO

move

the

lumbar

up

md

down,

hold

the

switch

upward

or

d~wnward.

Raise

QT

Bower the

fiont

of

the

seat

cushion

by

holding the

&ont

part

of

the

horizontal

COII~~

up

or

down.

I

8

Raise

or

Bower the entire seat

cushion

by

holding the

whole

horizonhl

control

up

or

down.

@

hsh

the vertical control

forward

to

bring

the seat

to

a

more

upright position.

Push

it

rearward

to

recline

the seatback.

Raise

or

lower

the

shoulder belt

aamd

head

rest

by

pushing

the vertical contro1

to

the

top

or

bottom.

You

can use this

memory

€unction

to

save

your

seat

cushion

(mintas

the head restraint),

optional lumbar,

mirror

adjustment,

window

lockout,

HVAc

and

radio

settings by using

the

foltlowing

procedure:

1.

You

must first

program

the

SEAT

RECALL

feature

to be

ON

when

this

choice

appears

on

the

DHC.

See

“Memory

Seat Recall” in the

hdex

fop

programming

instructions.

a.

P

4.

Adjust

the

driver’s seat

and

lumbar

position

(if

equipped) to

a

safe and comfortable driving position.

Adjust both outside mirrors to suit you. See “Outside

Mirrors”

in

the Index.

Press

one

of the two

MEMORY

buttons

corresponding with

your

driver number, for longer

than

three seconds.

You

will hear two beeps to

confirm

that

the

mirror

and

seat positions have been

entered into memory.

Press

WLOCK

on the transmitter within five seconds.

When your vehicle

is

in

PARK

(P),

push and release the

memory button you just stored. The

seat

and mirrors

will

move to the set position. You will hear one beep.

‘To

sct

the

seat

and mirror

positions

for a second

driver,

foilow the previous steps, but use the other

MEMORY

button.

If

you

press

thc

wrong

MEMORY

button,

or

if there

is

a

third

~iriver,

USC

t.tre:

seat adjuster.

The

EXIT

button

~BQWS

for

easy

exit

from

the vehicle.

Push

and release the

EXIT

button while in

PARK

(a>

and the seat will move

all

the way back. You will hear

a beep when the

EXIT

button is pressed.

You

can also

set

unique exit positions

by

moving

the

seat to the desired position,

and

then pushing

and

holding the

EXIT

button

for

greater than three seconds.

You

will

hear

two

beeps

to

confirm the position

has

been set. The

exit

position will be

set

€or

the previously

identified driver.

If

the ignition

is

not in

RUN,

automatic seat and

III~IX-Q~

movement will occur if the

UNLOCK

button on the

remote keyless entry transmitter

is

pressed. Automatic

seat

and

mirror movement

is

programmed through the

Driver Information Center

(DIC)

so

that the driver

can

select whether the seat moves

to

the programmed

driving position, the programmed exit

position,

or does

not

move at all.

For

memory seat and mirror recall

programming instructions, see “DIC Personal Choice

Programming”

in

the Index.

4

-4,

. . . .

,

.

The

heated seat controls

are

located next to the climate

controls

the

instrument

panel. Press

this

button to

turn

on

the heating element

in

the

seat.

..a

...

<-e..

.....

The

LO

setting

warms

the seatback

and

cushion

until

the

seat nears

body

temperature. The

HI

setting

heats the

seat

to

a

slightly

higher temperature.

A

telltale light

in

the control

reminds

you

that

the

heating system

is

in

use.

......

The

front seatbacks

can

be adjusted

by

pressing the

verticd control located on the side

of

the

seat. Push it

forward

40

bring the seat

to

a more upright position.

WPsh

it

rearward

to recline the seatback.

But

don’t

have

a

seatback

reclined

if

your

vehicle

is

moving.

Use

this

switch

to

move

a

front head restraint

up

or

down.

Lift

up on

the switch to move the head restraint

up. Press down on the switch to move the

%led

restraint

down.

The

top

of

the

head

restraint

should be closest to

the top of

your

ears.

This

position helps reduce the

chance

of

a neck

injury

in a crash.

When

you

move

a

Eront

seat head restraint

up

or down, the shoulder

belt

height changes. On some models,

the

head restraints tilt

forward

and

rearward

also.

Some rear seats have adjustable

head

restraints.

Slide

an

adjustable head restraint

up

or down

so

that

the

top

of

the

restraint

is

closest

to the

top

of

your ears.

"his

position reduces the

chace

of

a neck

injury

in

a

crash.

On

some

models, the rear seat

head

restraints

tilt

f~r~ad

md

rearward

dso.

There are

four

different

p~sitions

for

the front seat head

restraints

and

three

different

positions

for

elme

rear seat

head restraints. Adjust either head

restsaint

by grasping

the top

of

the restraint

and

moving

it

f~l7;~lmd

the

way

you

want it

to

go until

YOU

hear

a

click.

It

will

then

be

locked into that position

until

you

need

to

move it again.

Pulling it

forward

past the last position will allow the

headrest to return

to

its

full

rear position.

This part

of

the manual tells you how to use safety belts

properly. It also tells you some things you should not do

with safety beits.

And

it explains the Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS),

or

air bag system.

~ ~ ~~~~

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear

a

safety belt properly.

If

you are in

a

crash and

you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries

can be much worse. You can hit things inside the

vehicle or be ejected from

it.

You can be seriously

injured

or

killed. In the same crash, you might

not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your

safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts

are fastened properly too.

i

1

~

It

is

extremely dangerous

to

side

in

a cargo area,

people riding in these areas

are

more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

Do

not allow people

to

ride in any area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure

everyone in your vehicle

is

in a seat and using

a

safety belt properly.

I

inside or outside

of

a

vehicle. In a collision,

..r

Your

vehicle

has

a

light

that

comes

on

as

a

reminder

to buckle up. (See “Safety

Belt Reminder Light” in

the Index.)

In most states

and

Canadian

provinces,

the law says to

wear safety belts. Here’s why:

They

work.

You

never

know

if

you'll

be

in

a

crash.

If

yo3

do

have

a

crash,

you

don't

know

if

it

will

be

a

bad

oDe.

A

few crashes

are

mild, and some crashes can be

so

serious that even buckled

up

a

person

wouldn't

survive.

But

most

crashes

are

in

between.

In

many

of

them,

people

who

buckle

up

can survive

and

sometimes

walk

away.

Without

belts

they

could

have

been

badly

hurt

or

killed.

After

more

than

30

years

of

safety belts

in

vehicles,

the

facts

are

clear. In

most

crashes

buckling

up

does

matter

...

a

lot!

.....

..............................

:.:::::;:.:.::::.:.:.:-::

....................

................................................

_..:

.....

.*.....-

Fake the simplest vehicle. Suppose

It's

just

a

seat

on

wheels.

ht

someone

it.

,

. .

.

The

person

keeps

going

until

stopped

by

something.

In

a

red vebicle,

it

codd

be

the

windshield

...

or

the

instrument

panel

.

. .

or the safety belts!

With

safety belts, you

slow

down

as

the vehicle does.

You

get more

time

to

stop.

You

stop

over more distance,

and

your

strongest bones take

the

forces. That’s why

safety belts make such

good

sense.

Q:

Won’t

1

be trapped

in

the

vehicle

after

an

accident

if

I’m

wearing

a

safety belt?

A:

You

could

be

--

whether you’re wearing a safety

belt

or

not.

-But

you

can

unbuckle

a

sdety

belt,

even if you’re upside.down.

And

your

chance

of

being conscious

during

and

after

an

accident,

so

you

cun

unbuckle and get out,

is

much

greater if

you

are

belted.

@’

If

my

vehicle

has

air

bags,

why should

I

have

to

A:

Air

bags

are

in

many

vehicles

today and will be

in most

of

them

in

the future. But

they

are

supplemental systems

only;

so

they work

with

safety belts

--

not instead

of

them. Every

air

bag

system ever offered for

sale

has required the use

of

safety belts. Even if you’re

in

a

vehicle that

has

air

bags, you

still

have

to

buckle up to get the most

protection. That’s

true

not

only

in

frontal

collisions,

but especially in

side

and

other collisions.

wear safety belts?

@

If

I’m

a

good driver, and

I

never drive

€as

from

home, why should

I

wear safety belts?

A

t

YQU

may be

an

excellent driver,

but

if

you’re

in

an

accident

--

even

one

that isn’t your fault

--

you and

your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver

doesn’t protect you from things beyond your

control,

such

as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within

25

miles

(40

h>

of

home.

And

the greatest number

of

serious

injuries

and

deaths occur at speeds of less than

40

mph

(65

krm/h).

Safety belts

are

for everyone.

First,

you’ll want

to

know

which

restraint

systorris

your

vehicle has.

We’ll start

with

the driver

position.

This

part describes the driver’s restraint system.

The

driver has

a

lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear

it

properly.

1.

Close and lock

the

door.

2.

Adjust the seat

(to

see how, see “Seats”

in

the Index)

so

you

can

sit

up

straight.

3.

Pick

up

the

Batch plate

and

pull

the

belt across

you.

Don’t let

it

get twisted.

4.

Push

the

latch plate into

the

buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

E

the

belt isn’t

long

enough, see “Safety Belt

Extender” at the end. of

this

section.

Make sure the release

button

on

the buckle

is

positioned

so

you would be able

to

unbuckle the

‘safety

belt quickly

i€

you ever had

to.

A

ne

shoulder

belt

is

too

loose.

~t

won’t

give

nearly

as

much

protection

this

way.

J

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant

women.

Like

all

occupants, they are more likely

to

be

seriously injured

if

they don’t wear safety belts.

To

unlatch the belt, just push the button

on

the buckle.

The belt should

go

back out of

the

way.

Before you close the door,

be

sure the

belt

is out of the

way.

If

yon slam the door it, you can damage both the

belt

and

your vehicle.

A

pregnant woman

should

wear a lap-shodder belt, and

the lap portion should be

worn

as low

as

possible, below

the rounding,

throughout

the pregnancy.

The best way

to

protect the fetus

is

to

protect the

mother.

When

a

safety belt

is

worn properly,

it’s

more

likely that

the

fetus won’t

be

hurt in a crash. For

pregnane women,

as

for anyone, the key to making

safety belts effective

is

wearing them properly.

To

Bern

how

io

wear the right

front

passenger’s

safety belt properly, see “Driver

Po~itiod’

earlier

in

this section.

The right

front

passenger’s safety

beit

works the

same

way

as

the driver’s safety belt

--

except

for

one

thing.

If

you ever

pull

the

lap

p~rtio~~

of

the belt

out

all

the

way,

you

will

engage

the

child restraint locking feature.

If

this

happens, just let the

belt

go back

all

the way

and

stat

again.

hf

your vehicle

has

a center passenger position, be

sure

to use the correct buckie when buckhg your

fap-shoulder belt.

If

you find that the latch plate

will

not

go

fully

irrto

the buckle,

see

if

you

are

using

the

buckle

for

the center passenger position.

This

part

explains the Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)

or

ais

bag system.

Your vehicle

has

“Next

Generation” reduced-force

frontal

air bags

--

one

air

bag

~QI“

Fhe

driver

2nd

another

air bag

for

the right

front

passenger. Reduced-force

frontal

air

bags

are

designed to help seduce

the

risk

of

injury

from

the force

of

an

inflating frontal

air

bag.

Bst

even these

air

bags

xmst

inflate

very

quickly

if

they

ae

to

do

their

job

and comply

with

federal

regulations.

Here are

the

most

important things

to

know

about

the

air bag system:

CAmHoN:

(CQdIIUd)

Young children and infants need the protection

that

a

child restraint system

can

provide. Always

secure children properly in your vehicle.

To

read

how,

see the part

of

this

manual called

“Children”

and

see

the caution labels

on

the

smvisoss

and the right front passenger’s

safety

belt.

There is

an

air bag

readiness light

on

the

instrument panel, which

BAG

shows

AIR

BAG.

The system checks the

air

bag

electrical system for

malfunctions. The light

tells

YOU

if there

is

an electrical

problem. See

“Air

Bag Readiness Light” in the Index

for

more information.

..

...

.;

........

Where are the

air

bags?

The

driver’s

air

bag

is

in

the

middle

of

the

steering wheel.

.

..

’

”I

If

something

is

between an occupant and an

air

bag, the bag might not inflate properly

or

it

might force the object into that person. The path

of

an inflating

air

bag must

be

kept clear. Don’t

put anything between

an

occupant and

an

air

bag, and don’t attach

or

put anything on the

steering wheel hub

or

on

or

near any other air

bag ,covering.

The

right

front

passenger’s

air bag is in the instrument

panel

an

the

passenger’s

side.

When should

an

air

bag inflate?

An

air

bag is designed to inflate

in

a moderate to severe

frontal

or near-fiontal crash. The

air

bag will inflate only

if the impact speed is above the system’s designed

“threshold level.”

If

your

vehicle goes straight into

a

wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is

about

9

to

15

mph

(14

to

24

km/h).

The threshold level

can vary, however,

with

specific vehicle design,

so

that

it can

be

somewhat above or below

this

range.

If

your

vehicle strikes something that

will

move or deform,

such

as

a

parked

car, the threshold level will

be

higher.

The

air

bag is not designed to inflate

in

rollovers, side

impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help

the occupant.

In any particular crash,

no

one can say whether an air

bag

should

have inflated simply because ofthe damage

to

a

vehicle

or

because

of

what the repair costs were.

Inflation

is

determined by the angle

of

the impact and

how quickly the vehicle slows down

in

frontal or

near-frontal impacts.

What makes an air bag inflate?

In

an impact

of

sufficient severity, the air

bag

sensing

system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing

system triggers

a

release

of

gas from the inflator, which

inflates the

air

bag. The inflator, air bag and related

hardware are

all

part

of

the

air

bag

modules inside

the

steering wheel and

in

the instrument panel

in

front

of

the

right front passenger.

How does an air bag restrain?

In

moderate

to

severe frontal

or

near-frontal collisions,

even belted occupants can contact

the

steering wheel

or

the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection

provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of

the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper

body.

stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would

not help you in many types of collisions, including

rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily

because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air

bags. Air bags should never be regarded

as

anything

more than

a

supplement

to

safety belts, and

then

only in

moderate

to

severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.

What

will

YQU

see

after

an

air

bag

inflates?

After

an

air

bag inflates,

it

quickly deflates,

so

quickly

that

some

people may not even realize the air bag

inflated. Some components

of

the

air

bag

module

--

the

steering wheel hub

for

the driver’s air bag, or

the

instmrnent panel

for

the

right front passenger’s

bag

--

will be

hot

for

a

short

time.

$he

parts

of

the

bag that corne into contact

with

you

rnrty

be

warm,

but

not

too

hot

to

touch.

Therc

will

bc

some

smoke

and dust corning

from

vents

in

tlrc

rtcBlated

air bags.

Air

bag inflation doesn’t prevent

the

ch-iver

li.om

seeing or

from being able

to

steer

the

vehick.

IICX

does

it

stop

people

from

leaving

the

vehicic.

When

an

air bag inflates,

there

is

dust.

in

the ais.

This

dust could cause breathing

problerns

for

people with

a

history

of

asthma or

other

breathing trouble.

ab

avoid this, everyone in the

vehicle should get

out

as

soon

as

it

is

safe

to

do

so.

If

you have breathing problems but

can’t

get out

of

the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get

fresh

air by opening

a

window

or

door.

,:’tin.

haps

arc

designed

to

inflate

oniy

once. After they

ienr’i;rtc,

yuu’II

need

some new

puts

for

your

air

bag

systern.

If

you

don’t

get them,

the

air

bag system

won’t

be there

to

help protect

you

in

another crash.

A

new system

will

include air bag modules and

possibly

other

parts.

The

service

manual

for your

vehicle covers the need

to

replace other

parts.

@

Your vehicle

is

equipped

with

a

crash sensing and

diagnostic module,

which

records information about

eke

air

bag

system. The module records information

about

the readiness

of

the system, when the sensors

are activated

and

driver’s safety belt usage at

depioyment.

@

Let

only

qualified technicians work

on

your

air

bag system. Improper service can mean

that

your

air

bag

system

won’t work properly. See

your

dealer

for

service.

Air

bags

afFect

how

your

vehicle

should

be serviced.

There

are

parts

of

the air

bag

system

in

several places

around your

vehicle.

You

don’t want the system

to

inflate

while someone

is

working

on

your

vehicle.

Your

dealer and

the

Park

Avenue Service

Manual

have inforrnaeion

about

servicing

your

vehicle

and

the

air

bag system.

To

purchase a service manual, see

“Service and Owner Publications”

in

the Index.

FI

If

~UI-

vehicle

has

a

front

split seat

and

a

rear

bench

seat,

SQ~~OIE

can

sit

in

the

center

positions,

Wen

you

sit

in

a center seating position, you

have

a

Hap

safety

belt,

which

has no retractor.

To

make

the belt

longer, tilt

the

latch

plate

slnd

pull

it

along

the

belt.

To

make the belt shorter, pull its free end

as

shown until

the belt is snug.

Buckle, position

and

release

it

the same way as the lap

part

of

a

lap-shoulder belt.

If

the belt isn’t long enough,

see “Safety Belt Extender”

at

the end

of

this

section.

&ggp

Sea&

passq3ers

It’s very important

for

rear seat passengers

to

buckle up!

Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear

seat are hurt more often in crashes

than

those who are

wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted

can

be thrown

out

of

the vehicle in

a

crash.

And

they can strike others

in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Make sure the release button on the buckle

is

positioned

so

you

would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly

if

you

ever had to.

Egg=a~,~~~&es

The positions next

to

the windows have lap-shoulder

belts. Here’s how

to

wear me properly.

1.

Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you.

2.

Push the latch plate into the buckle

until

it

clicks.

Don’t let

it

get twisted.

If

the

belt

is

not long enough, see “Safety Belt

Extender”

at

the

end

of

this section. Make sure the

release button

on

the

buckle

is

positioned

SQ

YOU

would

be able

to

unbuckle

the

safety belt quickly

if

you

ever

had

to.

3.

TQ

make the

lap

part

tight, pull down on the buckle

end

of

the

belt

as

you

pull,

.up

on

the shoulder part. The lap

part

of

the

belt should be worn

low

and snug on

the hips, just touching the thighs.

In

a

crash,

this

applies

force

to

the

strong

peIvic bones. And you'd be less likely

to slide under

the

lap

belt. If you slid under it,

the

belt

would

apply force at

YOIN

abdomen.

This

could cause

serious or even fatal injuries.

The

shoulder belt should

go

over the shoulder and

~C~QSS

the

chest. These

parts

of

the

body are best able to take belt

restraining

forces.

The safety belt locks

if

there's a sudden

stop

or a crash.

_____..________._____

.....-.......

I

Rear shoulder belt

c~mfort

guides

will

provide added

safety

belt

COXII~QI-~

for children who have outgrown

child restraints

and

for

small

adults. Men installed on

a

shoulder belt,

the

codort guide pulls

the

belt

away

from

the

neck

and

head.

There

is

one guide

for

each outside passenger position

in

the rear seat.

TO

provide added

safety

belt

comfort

for

children

who

have outgrown

child

restraints

ad

for

smaller

adults,

the

COIII~Q~~

guides

may

be installed

on

the shoulder belts. Here's

how

to

install

a

comfort

guide

and

use

the

safety

belt:

1.

Remove

the

guide

from

its

storage pocket

QIZ

the side

of

the seatback.

I

2.

Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic

cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide

over the belt, and insert the

two

edges

of

the

belt into

the slots

of

the guide.

3.

Be sure that the belt

is

not

twisted

ad

it lies flat.

The elastic cord

must

be under the belt

and

the

guide

on

top.

4.

Buckle, position

and

release the safety belt as

described

in

“Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”

earlier

in

this

section. Make sure that the shoulder

belt crosses the shoulder.

To

remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze

the

belt edges together

so

that

you

can

take

them out

from

the

guides.

Slide

the

guide into its storage pocket on the

side

of

the seatback.

Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes

infants and all children smaller

than

adult size.

Neither

the distance traveled nor

the

age and size

of

the traveler

changes the need,

for

everyone,

to

use

safety

restraints.

In

fact, the law

in

every state in

the

United States and

in

every

Canadian

province

says

children up

to

some age

must be restrained while in

a

vehicle.

Children who

are

up against, or very close

to,

any

air

bag

when it

Mates

can

be

seriously injured

or Wed.

This

is true even though your vehcile

has

reduced-force frontal

air

bags. Air bags

plus

lag-shoulder

belts

offer

the

best

protection for

adults, but not for young children

and

infants.

Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air

bag system is designed for them. Young children

and

infants

need the protection that

a

child

restraint system can

provide.

Always

secure

children

properly

in

your

vehicle.

Smaller children and babies should always be

restrained in

a

child or infant restraint. The

instructions

for

the restraint will

say

whether

it

is

the right type and size for your child.

A

very young child’s hip bones are

so

small that

a

~

seguiar belt might not stay low

on

the

hips,

as

it

I

should. Instead,

the

belt will likely be

over

the

I

child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would

apply

’

f~~e

right

on

the child’s abdomen, which

could

~

cause serious

or

fatal injuries.

So,

be sure that

1

any

child small enough

for

one

is

always

properly

j

restrained in

a

child

or

infant restraint.

I

...

..

Never

hold

a

baby in your

am

while riding

in

a

vehicle.

A

baby doesn't weigh much

--

until a

crash. During a crash

a

baby

will

become

so

heavy you

can't

hold it.

For

example,

in

a

crash

CAUTION:

(Continued)

..i.

.

..

.........

i.'

.

,.

f

'

.I

.......

....

..

.,;.y

...............

.......

........

>

...

>>

...

.:

:.::

....

A:

Add-on

child restraints

are

available

in

four

basic

types.

When selecting a child restraint,

take

int~ consideration

not

only

the child’s weight

and

size, but

dso

whether

or

not the

restraint

will

be

compatible with

the

motor

vehicle

in

which

it

will

be

used.

An

infant

car

bed

(A)

is

a

specid

bed made

for

use

in

a

motor vehicle.

It’s

an

infant

restraint system

designed

to

restrain or

position

a

child

on

a

continuous flat

surface.

With

an

idat

car

bed,

make

sure

that the infant’s head rests

toward

the

center

of

the vehicle.

A

rear-facing

infant restraint

(B)

positions

an

infant

to

face

the

rear

of

the vehicle. Wear-facing infant

restraints are designed

for

infants

of

up

to

about

20

Ibs.

(9

kg)

agld

about

one year

of

age.

"his

type

of

restraint faces

the

rear

so

that the infant's head,

neck

and

body

can have the support they need

in

a

crash. Some

infant

seats come in

two

parts

--

the

base stays secured

in

the

vehicle

and

the seat

part

is

removable.

.:~~~:.:.:.~~:.:.:.~:~..

................

.

............._.

............

A

booster seat

(F,

G)

is

designed for children who

are about

40

to

6Q

Ibs.

(18

to

27

kg)

md

about

four to eight years

of

age. It’s designed

to

improve

the

fit

of

the vehicle’s safety belt

system.

Booster

seats

with shields

use

lap-only belts; however,

booster seats without

shields

use lapshoulder

belts. Booster seats can

also

help a child

to

see

out the window.

Wnen choosing

a

child restraint, be sure

the

child

restraint is designed to be used in

a

vehicle.

If

it

is,

it

will have

a

label saying that it meets Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety

Standards.

Ynen

foliow

the instructions for the restraint.

You

may

fixi

these instructions

on

the restraint itself or in

a

booklet,

or

both.

These restraints use the belt system

in

your vehicle, but the child

also

has to be secured within

the

restraint to help reduce

the

chance

of

personal. injury.

The insmctions that come with

the

infant

or

child

restraint

will show

YOU

how

to

do

that. Both the owner's

manual

and the chiid restraint instructions

are

important,

so

if

either one

of

these

is

not available, obtain

a

replacement copy from the manufacturer.

Wherever you install it, be sure

to

secure the child

restsa..int properly.

Keep

in

finad

that

m

unsecured

child

restraint

can

move

around

in

a

collision or sudden

stop

and

injure

people

in

the vehicle. Be sure

to

properly

secure my

child

restraint in

YOU

vehicle

--

even when

no

child

is

in

it.

If

your

child

restraint

has

a

top

strap,

it

should

be

anchored.

If

you

need

to

have

an

anchor

installed,

you

can

ask

your

Buick

dealer

to

gut

it

in for

YSU.

Hf

you

want

to

install

m

anchor

yourself9

your

deder

can

tell

you

how

to

do

it.

Canadian

law

requires

that

child

restraints have

a

top

strap,

and

that

the

strap

be

anchored.

C,',

,

.

:..:.>x

......

4.

Buckle

the

belt.

Make

sure the release

button

is

positioned

so

you

would

be

able to unbuckle the

safety

belt

quickly

if'

you

ever had

to.

5.

6.

..........

. .

,

.,

.

,

.

...........

To

tighten the belt, pull

up

on

the shoulder belt

while

you push down on the child restraint.

If

you're using

a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it

helpful to use your knee

to

push

down

on

the child

restraint as

you

tighten the belt.

Push

and

gull

the

child restraint in different

directions

to

be sure it

is

secure.

To

remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's

safety belt

and

let it

go

back dl the way. The

safety

belt

will move freely again and be ready to work for

m

adult

or

larger child passenger.

A

child in

a

child.

restraint

in

the

center €ront

seat can be

badly

injnred

~1

killed

by

the

sight

front

passenger

air

bag

if

it

idates,

even

though

your

vehicle

has

reduced-force

frontal

air

bags.

Never secure

a

child restraiamt

in

the center

front

seat. It’s

always

better

to

secure

a

child

restraint

in

the

rear

seat.

You

may

secure

a

forward-facing

child

restraint

in

the right

font

passenger seat,

but

before

you

do,

always

PPEQV~

the

fr~nt

passenger

seat

as far back

as

it

will

gap.

It’s

better

to

secure

the

child

restraint

in

8

rear

seat.

See

the

earlier

part

about

the

top

strap

if

the

child

restraint

has

one.

L

I.

Make

the

belt

&Y

!omg

as

possible

by

tilting the Batch

2.

But

&e

reatmint

on

the

seat.

3.

Run

the

vehidc's

safety belt through

or

around the

restraint.

The

child restraint instructions will show

you

how.

plate

and

pulling

,it

dong

the

belt.

4.

Buckle the belt. Make sure

the

release button is

positioned

so

you would be able to unbuckle the

safety

belt quickly if you ever had to.

5.

To

tighten the belt, pull its free end while

you

push

down on

the

child restraint.

If

you're using

a

forward-facing child restraint,

you

may

find

it

helpful to use

your

knee to push down

on

the child

restraint

as

you tighten the belt.

6.

Push

and

pull

the

child

restraint

in

differezt

directions

to

be

sure

it

is

secure.

To

remove

the

child restraint, just

unbuckle

the vehicle’s

sa€ety belt.

It

will

be

ready

to

work for

an

adult

cr

larger

child passenger.

U

YQUT

vehicle

has

a

right

front

passenger air

bag.

Never

put

a

rear-facing child restraint

in

this seat. Here’s

why:

You’ll

be

using

the

lap-shoulder

belt.

See the earlier

part

aboemt

the

top

strap

if

the

chiid

restraint

has

one.

Be

sure

to

FokBow

the

instructions that came

with

the

child

restraint.

Secure

the

child

in

the

child restraint

when

and

as

the instructions

say.

1.

Because

your

vehicle

has

a

right front passenger

air

bag,

always move the seat as far back

as

it

wi6i

go

before securing

a

forward-facing

child

restraint.

(See

“Seats”

in

the

Index.)

2.

Put

the restraint

on

the seat.

3.

Pick

up

the

latch

plate, and

run

the lap

and

shoulder

portions of

the vehicle’s safety

belt

through

or

around

the

restraint.

The

child restraint instructions

will show

you

how.

-

..

L

-

7

&fcT

4.

Buckle the belt. Make

sure

the

release

button

is

positioned

so

you would be

able

to

unbuckle

the

safety

belt quickly

if

you ever had to.

5.

Pull

the

rest

of

the

kip

belt

dl

the way out

of

the

retractor

to

set

the

lock.

r

6.

TQ

tighten the

belt,

feed the lap belt back into the

retractor while you push

down

on

the child restraint.

~QU

may

find

it

helpful

to

use pur knee to push

down

on

the child restraint

as

you tighten the belt.

If

you have the choice,

a

child should sit next to a

window

so

the

child can wear a lap-shoulder belt

and

get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

7

Bush

and

pull

the

child restraint in different

$0

emove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s

directions to be sure it is secure.

belt and let

it

go back

all

the way. The safety

belt

Nil1

move

freely again and be ready to work for

an

adult

larger child passenger.

Accident

statistics show

that children

are

safer

if

they

are restmined

in

the rear seat.

But

they need to use the

safety belts properly.

e

Children

who

aren’t buckled

up

can be

thrown

out

e

Children

who

aren’t

buckled

up

can

strike other

in

a

crash.

people

who

are.

. .

..

A:

~ove

~e

c~d

~QWS~

&e

center

of

fie

vekcle,

but

be

sure that

the

shoulder belt still

is

0111

the child’s

shoulder,

so

that

in

a

crash the child’s upper body

would have the restraint

that

belts provide.

If

the

child

is

sitting

in

a

rear

seat

outside position,

see

“Rear

Safety

Belt

Comfort

Guides”

in

the Index.

If

the

child

is

SO

small that

the

shoulder

belt

is

still

very

close

to

the

child’s

face

or

neck,

you

might

want

to

place

the

child

in

the center

seat

position,

the

one

that has

only

a

lap

belt.

I

{;y

..,.

*.F

6%

<$T,7

+<:

-74-

qyy:..-

..e

,3

&,-'"

!,.J&L\Y&

u;:e;&

&JJJg?

:::.:

SbX

If

the vehicle's safety belt will fasteE

around

you, you

should use it.

But

if

a

safety belt isn't

long

enough

io

fasten, your

dealer

will

order you an extender.

It's

free. When

you

go

in

io

order

it,

take the heaviest

coat

you

will

wear,

SO

the

extender will be long enough

for

you.

The

extender

will

be just

for

you,

and

just for the seat

in

your vehicle

that

you choose. Don't

let

someone else

use

it,

and

use

it

only

for

the seat it is made to fit.

To

wear

it,

just

attach

it

to

the regular safety

bel:.

zsl.

CP

i5,atu.

..

i::

,::-q

gpc$.?3;+:

7,

&<

0 7.7

gQf2-C

-

~~~~~~~~~~~~

-cy..

Sy@eps,

W

I.&&&%

(.

-,

&

d

Now

and

then, make sure

the

safety belt rerniader light

and

all

your belts, buckles, latch

plates,

retractors

and

anchorages are

working

properly.

Look

for

any

other

loose or damaged safety belt system

parts.

If

you

see

anything that might keep

a

safety belt system from

doing

its

job,

have

it

repaired.

Tom

or frayed safety

belts

may

not

protect

you

in

a

crash. They can rip

apart

under impact forces.

If

a

belt

is tom or frayed,

get

a

new

one

right

away.

Also

look

for

army opened

or

broken air

bag

covers, and

have them repaired

or

replaced. (The air

bag

system

does

not

need regular maintenance.)

2-2

2-4

2-

8

2-

I4

2-

15

2-16

2-18

2-20

2-22

2-

23

2-24

2-27

2-28

2-3

f

2-3

I.

B[,aePfng

young

children

in

a

vehicle with the

ignition

key

is

dangerous

for many

reasons.

A

&ild

or

others could be badly injured

or

even

killed.

They

could operate power windows

or

other

controls

or

even make the vehicle move.

Don't

leave

the

keys

in

a

vehicle with

young

children.

....

:.:.:.:A:::

...:.:

....

......

.......

:....

............

:

&.$&

.....

.......

Your

vehicle has a

two

key system. One key

is

the

master

and

the other

is

a

valet key.

The master key

is

used

for

the ignition,

as

well

as

all door

locks

ad

storage compartments.

The vdet key

is

used for the

ignition and the

two

side

doors

only.

It

will not open

the

trunk

or glove

box.

This

is

a

theft-deterrent feature.

The vdet key should always

be used when valet

puking

your

vehicle.

Wen

a

new vehicle

is

delivered, the deder removes

the

plugs

from

the keys,

and

gives

them

to

the

first owner.

However,

if

the ignition key does

not

have

a

plug,

there

may

be

a

bar-coded key tag instead.

Each

plug

has

a

code

on

it

that

tells

your

dealer or a

qualified

locksmith

how to

make

extra keys. Keep the

plugs

in

a safe place.

If

you lose your keys, you'll be

able

to

have

new ones made easily

using

these

plugs

or

the

tag.

If

your ignition keys

don't

have

plugs,

go

to

your dealer

for

the correct key code

if

you need

a

new

ignition

key.

2-3

There

are

several

ways

to

lock

and

unlock

your

vehicle.

From

the

outside,

use

your

door

key

QE.

remote keyless

entry

transmitter.

OOF

U~l~Cki~g

system

”

From

outside the vehicle,

if

the driver’s door

key

is held

in

the

~n10ck

position for more

than

two S~CQII~S, or,

if

the key is turned to

the

unlock

position twice within

three seconds,

all

doors

will

unlock.

With

power door

loch,

you

can

lock

or

unlock

zd1

doors

of

your

vehicle

by

using

either the driver or front

passenger power door

lock

switch.

If

your

vehicle

is

equipped

with

the Driver

Information

Center

(DIC),

and

a

d~or

is

not

klly

closed, the

DK

will

&splay

a-DOOR

AJAR

message. See “Driver

Information Center”

in

the hdex.

Memory

Door

Locks

Close

he

doors

and

turn

on

the

ignition.

Every

time

YOU

move the

shift

lever

out

of

PARK

(P),

all

of

the

doors

will

lock.

And,

every

time

you

stop

anad

move

the

shift

lever into

PARK

(P),

the

doors

will

unlock.

If

someone

needs

to

get out

while

you’re

not

in

PARK

(P),

have

that

person use

the

maual

or

power

lock. When

the

door

is

closed

again,

it

will

not

lock automatically.

Just

use

the

mmud

or

power

lock

to

lock the door

again.

If

YOU

need to lock

the

doors before

shifting

out

of

PARK

(PI,

just use

the

manual

or

power

lock

button

to

lock

‘the

doors.

0

E

2

3

Operation

No

automatic

door

lock

or

unlock.

All

doors automaticaily lock when

shifted

out

of

PARK

(P).

No

automatic

door

UdQCk.

A11

doors automatically lock when shifted

out

of

BARK

(P).

Only

the driver's door

automatically unlocks when shifted into

PARK

(B).

AI1

doors automatically lock when shifted

out

of

PARK

(B).

All

doors automatically

unlock when shifted into

PARK

(P).

Vehicies

are

delivered programmed

in

Mode

3;

however,

each remote

keyless

entry transmitter can be

programmed to

a

different

mode

according to the

trser's preference.

To

change

modes:

I.

Close

all

the doors

and

turn

the ignition

OE.

Keep

all

doors

dosed throughout this procedure.

2.

Press

and

hold

LOCK

on

the power door lock switch

on the driver's

door

through

Step

4.

3.

Press

the

LOCK

button

on

the remote keyless entry

transmitter to enter the programming mode.

The

memory

door

lock mode will

remain

in

the

current mode.

4.

Press

the

LOCK

button on the transmitter again.

Each time the transmitter's LOCK button

is

pressed,

the

mode

will advance

by

one, going

from

mode

3

to

mode

0

to mode

1,

etc.

For

each

press

of

the

LOCK

button,

the

door

locks

will

activate

in

the

same

manner

they

would

activate

in

the corresponding

memory

door

lock mode. For

example, pressing

the

LOCK

button on the

transmitter

to

advance

to

mode

2

would result in a11

doors

lockicg

aimd

then.

only

the driver's

door

would

unlock.

For

Mode

0,

no

locking

or

unlocking

Will

QCCUT.

5.

Release

the

power door

lock

switch

md

turn

the

ignition

of..

The automatic door

locks

will remain in

the most recent mode selected.

YOU

can

also

program the

memory

door Bocks feature

using

the Driver Information Center. See “Driver

Information Center Personal Choice Programming”

in

the Index.

CHILD

SECURITY

LUCK

SET

LWEA

ON BOTH

REAP

DOORS

Your

vehicle

is

equipped

with rear door security

Iocks that help prevent

passengers

from

opening

the rear

doors

of

your

vehicle

from

the inside.

To

use

one

of

these

locks:

1.

Open one

of

the rear

doors.

2.

Move

the lever on the door all the way

up

to

the

ENGAGED

position.

3.

Close the door.

4.

Do

the

same

thing

to

the other rear

door

jock.

The rear

doors

of

your vehicle cannot

be

opened from

the inside when

this

feature

is

in

use.

To

open

a

rear

door

when the security ‘rock

is

on:

1.

Unlock

the

door

from

the inside.

2.

Then open the

door

from

the outside.

If

you

don’t

cancel

the

security lock feature, adults

or

older

children

who

ride

in

the rear won’t be able

to

open

the

rear

door

from

the inside.

You

should

let

adults

and

older children know

how

these security

Iocks

work,

and

how

to

cancel

the

locks.

To

cancel the rear

door

security lock:

1.

Unlock

the

door

from the inside and open the

door

from

the outside.

2.

Move the lever all the way down.

3.

Do

the

same thing

for

the other rear

door.

The

rear

door

Bocks will now work normally.

The power door locks will not

work

if the key is left in

the ignition, the ignition is turned to

OFF

and the

driver's door is open.

You

can

override this feature

by

holding the power door lock switch

for

more than

three seconds.

If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your

door and set the locks from inside, then get out and close

the door.

With the remote keyless

entry system,

you

can lock

and unlock your doors or

unlock your trunk from

about

3

feet

(I

m) up to

30

feet

(9

m>

away using

the remote keyless entry

transmitter supplied

with

your vehicle.

Your

remote

keyless

entry system operates

on

a

radio

frequency subject to Federal Communications

Commission

(FCC)

Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies

with

Part

15

of

the

FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject

to

the following two conditions:

(I)

this device

may

not

cause harmful interference,

and

(2)

this device must accept

any

interference received,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

This

device complies with RSS-210

of

Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following

two

conditions:

(I.)

this

device may

not

cause interference, and

(2)

this

device must accept any interference received, ir,cluding

interference

that

may cause undesired operation

of

the device.

Changes

or

modifications

to

this

system by other than an

authorized service facility could vcid authorization

to

use this equipment.

This system has a range

of

about

3

feet

(1

rn)

up

to

30

feet

(9

m).

At

times you may notice

a

decrease

in

range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry

system.

If

the

transmitter does not work or if you have

to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter

to

work, try this:

@

Check

to

determine

if

battery replacement is

necessary. See the instructions that follow.

0

Check the distance.

You

may be

too

far from your

vehicle.

You

may need

to

stand closer during rainy

or

snowy weather.

0

Check the locatioE. Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the

signal.

Take a few steps to

fhe

left or

right,

hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

0

Tf

you‘re still having trouble, see your dealer

or

a

qualified technician for service.

The

driver’s

door

will unlock when

UNLOCK

is

pressed.

If

pressed again within five

seconds,

all

doors

will unlock. Pressing any

button

will

also

iilurninate the

interior lamps (see “Illuminated Entry”

in

the

Hndexj.

AS1

doors

will

lock

when

LOCK

is

pressed.

The

trunk

will unlock when the trunk button is pressed,

and the ignition

is

in

LOCK

or

OFF.

The

tm&

button

will also work when

the

ignition

is

on,

but ormly while

in

PARK

(P).

When

the

button with the

horn

symbol

on

the remote

keyless entry transmitter

is

pressed, the

horn

will sound

and

the

headlamps and taillamps

wiE

flash

for

up

to

30

seconds. This

can

be

turned

off

by

pressing the

instant alarm button again or by

turning

the ignition on.

If

your vehicle

is

equipped

with

the

Content

Theft-Deterrent feature,

you

may

also

turn

off

the

instant alarm

by

unlocking

the

vehicle

with

a key.

If only the instant alarm button works, the transmitter

needs to be resynchronized

to

the receiver.

Do

this by

pressing and holding

both

the

LOCK

and

UNLOCK

buttons on

the

transmitter for

about

eight seconds. You

must

be within range

of

the vehicle.

Once the transmitter

has

been resynchonized, the horn

will chirp

and

the exterior

lamps

will flash

once.

The

system should now operate properly.

-77

F

I

1

~pf;c&YYJAy~pl‘i.

s,ptezi

The remote keyless entry transmitter will

m

the

theft-deterrent system whenever the

doors

are

closed

and you push the

LOCK

button when the ignition is

off.

It

will disarm the system when

you

push

UNLOCK.

7.-

::+=~*~~p&

.?>iD;ee

F@%&:sFzs

;,&

/

..-

c-

Z..q&@;e$.>

-

-A

Each remote keyless entry transmitter can be

programmed

to

the driver’s preference €or memory

QQOF

Bocks, security feedback, delayed locking, memory seats,

perimeter lighting, parallel

park

assist

WQ~

and

window lockout. See each feature

in

the Index.

You

can

also personalize your

comfort

control temperature,

mode

and fan settings. See

“Comfort

Controls Personal

Choice” in the Index.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information

Center

(DIC),

you

can

also

program these features

through the

DIC.

See “Driver Information Center”

in

the Index.

This provides feedback

to

the driver when the vehicle

receives a command

from

the remote keyless entry

transmitter. The following modes may

be

selected:

Mode

Security

Feedback

0

I

2

3

4

J

c

No

feedback when locking

or

unlocking vehicle.

No

feedback when locking; exterior

lamps

flash when unlocking vehicle.

Exterior

iarnps flash when locking;

nc

feedback when unlocking vehicle.

Exterior

lamps

tlash

when locking and

when

unlocking vehick.

Exterior

lamps

flash

and

hcrn chirps

when locking;

no

feedback when

unlocking vehicle.

Exterior

lamps

flash

and

horn

chirps

when locking; exterior

iarnps

flash

when

unlocking vehicle.

Vehicles are delivered programmed

in

Mode

5;

however,

each remote keyless entry transmitter can be

programed

to

a

difTerent

mode

according

to

the user‘s

preference.

To

change to another mode:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Press

and

hold

LOCK

on

the power door lock switch

on

the

door

throughout the procedure.

Press the

trunk

button

on

the

traasmitter.

The

horn

will ChiiT and the transmitter

will

remain

in

its

current

mode.

Press

the

trunk

button

again. Each time the

tmmk

button

is

pressed, the

horn

wiil chirp and

the

transmitter

will

advance

eo

the next mode.

Release the power door lock switch.

If

your

vehicle

is

equipped with the Driver Infomation

Center

4DEC),

you

can also program

these

features

through the

DIC.

See “Driver

Enformation

Ceater”

in

the

Index.

~&XlqrqzL&

Lf&+-?g

i

ALL”

This feature

Heis

the dnver delay the actuaI locking

of

the vehicle. When the power

door

lock switch

is

pressed

with

the

key removed

from

the ignition and the driver’s

door

open, a chime will sound thee times to signal that

the Hock delay mode

is

active. Wen all

doors

have been

closed, the doors

wiI.1

lock

automaticalIy after five

seconds.

If

any

door

is

opened

before

this, the

five-second timer will reset itself once all the doors have

been closed

again.

Pressing

the

door

Bock

switch

twice within two seconds

will

override this feature.

2.

3.

Press

and

hold

LOCK

OR

the

power door lock switch

on

the

door

throughout

this

procedure.

All

the doors

will lock.

Press the

UNLOCK

button

om

the transmitter

to

enter the progrmming

mode.

The

lock

delay

is

still

off

and all doors

will

remain locked.

Press the

UNLOCK

button

on

the transmitter again.

Lock delay

is

now active

and

dl

doors

will unlock.

4.

Release

the

power

door

lock switch.

To

turn

this feature

off,

repeat the above procedure.

If

your

vehicle

is

equipped

with

the Driver infomation

Center

(DIC),

you

can also program these features

through the

DE.

See “Driver

Information

Center”

in

the Index.

Each remote keyless entry transmitter

is

coded

to

prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.

If

a transmitter

is

lost or stolen, a replacement can

be

purchased through your dealer. Remember

to

bring any

remaining transmitters with you when

you

go

to

your

dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement

transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters

must

also

be matched. Once your dealer has coded the

new

transmitter, the lost transmitter will

not

unlock your

vehicle. Each vehicle can have only

four

transmitters

matched

to

it.

See your dealer to match additional transmitters

to

your vehicle.

Under normal use,

the

battery

in

your remote keyless

entry transmitter should last about four years.

You can tell the battery is weak

if

the transmitter won’t

work at the normal range

in

any ‘location.

If

you have

to

get close

to

your vehicle before the transfitter works,

it’s probably time

to

change the battery.

For battery replacement, use a Duracell@ battery, type

DL-2032,

or a similar type.

To

replace the battery:

1.

Insert

a coin into the notch near the

key

ring.

Turn

the coin to the left

to

separate the two halves

of the transmitter.

2.

Once the transmitter

is

separated, use

a

pencil eraser

to

remove the

old

battery.

Do

not

use a metal object.

3.

Remove

and

replace the battery as the instructions

under the cover indicate.

4.

Snap the transmitter back together tightly to

be

sure

no

moisture can enter.

5.

Resynchronize the transmitter by pressing

and

holding the

LOCK

and

UNLOCK

buttons

for

about

eight seconds within range

of

the vehicle. Once the

transmitter is resynchronized, the

horn

will

chirp

and

the exterior lmps

will

flash

once.

To

unlock the trunk

from

the outside,

insert

the master

doorhgnition key

and

turn it.

,@~~~o.e

'

7\

-..

,;,Jp;qk

g&5g2qe

Press

the

TRUNK

release

beztton

located

to

the

left

of

the steering column to release the trunk lid.

The

tmnk

wikf

open if the transaxle is

in

BARK

(P)

or

NEUTRAL

(N)

and the

trunk

release lockout

is

in

the

unlocked position.

The remote keyless entry system

will

also unlock your

trunk if the ignition

is

off,

or

if the ignition

is

on

and

the

transaxle is in

PARK

(FD).

w..

L.

The

remote

trunk

release lockout button allows you

to

secure items

in

the trunk.

Insert the ignition key into

the

tmnk

release

button.

Turn

the

key one-quarter

of

a turn to the right then

remove

it

from the button.

This

will

disable the tmnk release

button

from opening

the tmnk.

It can be dangerous

to

drive with the

trunk

lid

open

because carbon

monoxide

(CO)

gas

can

come

into your vehicle.

YOU

can’t see

or

smell1

CO.

It

can cause unconsciousness

and

even death.

If

you must drive with

the

trunk

lid

open

OF

if

electrical wiring or other cable connections

must

pass through the seal between the body

and

the

trunk lid:

0

Make sure all windows are shut.

Turn the

fan

on

your heating

OF

cding

system to

its

highest speed

with

the

setting

on

any airflow selection except

RECHWC.

That will force outside

air

inkt

your vehicle.

See

“Comfort

Controls” in the Index.

If

you

have

air

outiets

on

or

under

the

instrument panel,

open

them

all

the

way.

See “Engine Exhaust’’ in the Index.

.-p->:.

.

I.

!<

:.

I

1.:

::::,

.,,::.-<:.

--

:,

Vehicie theft

is

big business,

especiafly

in

some

cities.

Although

yaur

vehicle

has

a

number

of

theft-deterrent

features. we

know

that nothing

we

put

on

kt

can

make

it,

impossible

to steal.

However,

there

are

wzys

you

can

help.

....

-

.LL;;

,

.:.L

<,.c;;.;;

&iLL&:.<

..I.:-

:i4,’

.T”T$,T

.:,..-.

.?L.

>-

P

.”

..<.

:<.:,-.-.

If

you

leave

YQUF

vehicle

with

the keys inside,

it’s

m

easy

target

for

joy

riders

or

professional

thieves

--

so

don’t

do

it.

With

the

ignition

off

and

the

driver’s

door

open,

YQU’IB

hear a

chime

reminding you

to

remove

your key from

the ignition

md

take

it

with you. Always

do

tk.

Your

ignition

and

trmsaxie

will

be

Hocked.

And

remember

to

lock the

doors.

:;c.

15

;:,-

<

FA:.

c:

Fi,

;-

3;::

c,;

::-$

.:;-

Pa-k

in

a

lighted

spot,

close

all

windows

and

lock

your

vehicle. Remember

to

keep

your

valuables

out

of

sight.

Put

them

in

a

storage

area,

or

take them with you.

.

..

.

-~

-.&ZL

“7.:.

-

,

..._

2

GA

&nr2.,

_v

:

--;<.

..Ab

v

3

.-

:

:.;t~r.e

purk

in

a

lot

where someone will be watchng

.I

i

w;

vetticlc,

it’s

best

to

lock it up

and

take your keys.

iSfdB

what

if

you have to leave your ignition key?

..

Q

IF

possible,

park

in

a

busy,

well lit area.

Put

your valuables in a storage

area,

like your

trunk

or glove

box.

Be sure

to

close and

lock

the

storage

area.

Close

all

windows.

Lock

the glove

box.

Lock all

doors

except the driver’s.

Give the valet key

to

the valet.

Then

take the

master

key

and

remote keyless

entry

transmitter with you.

YQW vehicle is equipped

with

a

Content

Theft-Deterrent alarm

system. With this system,

the

SECURITY

light

will

flash

as

you open

the

door

(if your ignition is

off).

This

light reminds

you

to activate the theft-deterrent

system. Here’s

how

to

do it:

I.

Open

the

door.

2.

Lock the

door

with the power door lock switch or the

remote keyless entry transmitter.

The

SECURITY

light should

come

on

and

stay

on.

3.

Close all

doors.

The

SECURITY

light should go

off

after approximately

30

seconds. The

alarm

is

not

armed until

the

SECURITY

light

goes

off.

If

a

door

is

opened without the key

OF

the remote keyless

entry transmitter, the alm will

go

off.

Your vehicie‘s

lamps will flash and the

horn

will sound for

30

seconds,

then

will

turn

of€

to

save battery power.

Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if

you

!ock the

doors

with

a

key

or

use

the

manual

door

lock.

kt

activates only if you use a power door lock

switch with the

door

open,

or

with the remote keyless

entry transmitter.

You

should

also

remember that

you

can

start your vehicle with the correct ignition key

if

the

alm

has

been set

off.

Were’s how

to

avoid setting

off

the dam by accident:

I€

you

don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent

system, the vehicle

should

be

locked

with the door

key

after

the doors

are

closed.

e

Always

U~IQC~

a

door with a key, or

use

the

remote

keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking

a

door

any other

way will set

of€

the

alarm.

If

you set

off

the

alarm

by accident, unlock any

door

with your key.

You

can also

turn

off

the

alm

by

pressing

UNLOCK

on

the remote keyless entry

transmitter. The

aim

won’t stop if you

try

to

unlock a

door

any other way.

The

aEm

can

be

tested by following these steps:

1.

From inside the vehicle, roll

down

foe driver’s

window and

open

the driver’s

door.

2.

Activate the system by locking the

doors

with the

power

door

lock switch while the door

is

open,

or

with

the

remote keyless entry transmitter.

SECURITY

light

to

go

out.

3.

Get

out

of

the car, close the door

and

wait

€or

the

4.

Then reach

in

through

the window,

unioclc

the

door

with the manual

door

lock

and

open the

door.

This

shouhd

set

off

the

altum.

If

the

alarm

does

not

sound when

it

shdd

but the

vehicle‘s

iiamps

flash,

check to see if the

horn

works.

The

horn

fuse may be

blown.

TQ

replace the

fuse,

see

“Fuses and

Circrrit

Breakers“

in

the

Index.

HE

the

alarm

does

not

sound

or

the vehicle’s

Bamps

dc

not

flash, the vehicle

should

be

serviced by

an

authorized

service center.

Your

vehicle is equipped

with the PASS-Key

III

(Persondized Automotive

Security System)

theft-deterrent system.

PASS-Key

HHI

is

a

passive

theft-deterrent system.

This

means you don’t have

to

do

anything different

to

arm

or

disarm

the system. It

works

when

YOU

insert or remove

the key

from

the ignition.

Your PASS-Key

III

system operates on a radio

frequency

subject

to

Federal Communications

Commission

(FCC)

Rules

and with Industry Canada.

This device complies

with

Part

15

of

the

FCC

Rules.

Operation

is

subject

to

the following two conditions:

(I)

this device may not cause harmful interference,

and

(2)

this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

This

device

complies

with

RSS-210

of

Industry

Canada.

Operation

is

subject

to

the following two conditions:

(I)

this device may not cause interference, and

(2)

this

device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation

of

the device.

Changes

or

modifications to this system by other than

an

authorized service facility could void authorization to

use

this equipment.

PASS-Key

HI1

uses

a

radio frequency transponder

in

the

key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

When the PASS-Key

III

system senses that someone is

using the wrong key, it shuts

down

the vehicle’s starter

and fuel systems.

The

starter

will not work and

he8

will

stop being delivered

to

the engine. Anyone using

a

trial-and-error method

to

start

the

vehicle

will

be

discouraged because

of

the high number

of

electrical

key codes.

When trying

to

start

the vehicle

if

the engine does

not

start and the

SECURITY

light comes

on,

the key may

have

a

damaged transponder.

Turn

the ignition

off

and

try again.

If

the engine still does not start,

and

the key appears

to

be undamaged,

try

mother ignition key. At this time,

you may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and

Circuit Breakers’‘

in

the

Index).

If

the engine

still

does

not

start

with

the other key, your vehicle needs service.

If

your vehicle does

start,

the

€kt

key may be faulty.

See your dealer or a

Iocksrnith

who

can

service the

PASS-Key

IIH

tc

have

a

new key

Bade.

It is possible

for

the

PASS-Key

IIP

decoder

to

learn the

transponder value

of

a

new replacement key.

Up

to

ten additional keys may be programmed

for

the

vehicle.

This

procedure

is

€or learning additional keys only. If

all

the currently programed keys

are

lost or

do

not

operate,

you

must see your dealer or

a

locksmith who

can service PASS-Key

HI1

to have keys made and

programmed

to

the

system.

See

your

dealer

or

2

locksmith

who

can service

PASS-Key

III

to get

2

new

key

blank

that

is

a

cut

exactly

as

a

current black colored driver’s key that

operztes the system.

Do

not

use

2

gray colored

valet

key

for this procedure.

To

program the new key:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Insert the

cumrent

driver’s key (black

in

color)

i~*

the

ignition

and

start the engine.

If

the engine wiil not

start

see your dealer for service.

After the engine has started,

turn

the key

to

the

off

position,

and

remove

the

key.

Insert the key

to

be

progrmmed

and

turn

it to the

mn

position within ten seconds

of

removing the

previous key.

The

SECURITY

telltale iight

will

off

once the

key

has

been programmed.

It

may not be apparent

that

the

SECURITY

light went on due

to

how

quickly

the

key

is

programmed.

Repeat steps

1

through

4

if

additional

keys are

to

be programmed.

ff

you

are ever driving

and

the

SECURITY

iight comes

or;

and stays

on,

you will be able to restart

your

engine

if

you

turn

it

off.

Your BASS-Key

III

system, however,

is

not

working properly

and

must be serviced by your

dealer.

You

vehicle

is

not

protected by

the

PASS-Key

III

system at

this

time.

If

you

lose

or damage a PASS-Key

I11

key,

see

your

dealer or a

locksmith

who can service

PASS-Key

HIT

to

have a

new

key made.

NOTICE:

0

With

the

ignition

key

in

the

ignition

switch,

you

can

turn

the switch

to

five

different

positions.

A

I

i

v

i

2-

E

ACCESSORY

(A):

In

this

position

you

can

operate

your

eiectricall power

accessories.

Press

in

the

ignition

switch

as

you

turn the

top

of

it

toward

you.

I

LOCK

@I:

This is

the

only

position

from

which

YOU

can remove the

key.

This

position

locks

YOU

igition,

steering wheel

and

transaxle.

It’s

a

theft-deterrent feature.

OFF

(C):

This

position

lets

YOU

turn

ofif

the engine

but

still

turn

the steering wheel.

It

doesn’t lock the steering

wrlhee1

like

LOCK

and

it

doesn’t send

my

electrical

power to

the

accessories.

The

instrument

panel

cluster

will

remain powered

in

OFF

to

illarminate

the

gear

sWt

indicator. The

cluster

will

also

activate the parking brake

fight

when the parking brake

is

set. Use

OW

if

you

must

have

your

vehicle

in

motion

while the

engine

is

not

mnanaing.

RUN

(D):

This

is

the

position

that

the

switch returns

to

after

you

start

YSUP

engine

and

release

the

switch.

This

is

&e

p~sisi~n

for

driving. Even when

the

engine

is

not

running,

you

can

use

RUN

to

operate

your

electrical

power

accessories

anad

t~

display

some

instrument

panel

START

(E):

This

position

starts

your

engine. When the

engine

starts,

release

the key.

The ignition switch

will

return

to

RUN

for

~a~rrrnal

driving.

wdng lights.

Retained

Acces§ory

Power

After

you

turn

the ignition

off

md

even

remove

the

key,

you

will

still

have

electrical

power to such

accessories

as

the radio,

astroroof

ad

power windows

for

up

to

10

minutes. Power

is

shut

off

if

you

open

a

door.

2-21

Move your shift lever to

BARK

(B)

or

NEUTRAL

(N).

Your

engine won’t start in any other position

--

that’s

a

safety feature.

To

restart when you’re already moving,

use

NEUTRAL

(N)

only.

1

NOTICE:

Don9t

try

to

shift

to

PARK

(a)

if

your

hick

is

moving.

If

YOU

do,

YOU

could

damage

the

transaxle.

Shift

to

PARK

(P)

only

when

your

vehicfe

is

stopped.

8.

Without

pushing

the accelerator pedal,

turn

your

ignition

key

to

START.

When the engine

starts,

let

go

of

the key. The idle speed will

go

down

as your

engine gets wann.

NOTICE:

Holding

your key in START

€or

longer

than

15

seconds

at

a

time

will

cause

your battery

to

be

drained much sooner.

And

the excessive

heat

can

damage your starter

motor.

2.

if

it

doesn’t start

right

away,

hold

your

key

in

START

for about three to five seconds

at

a time

until

your engine starts. Wait about

15

seconds between

each

try

to help avoid draining your battery

or

damaging your starter.

3.

If your engine

still

won’t

start

(or

starts but

then

stops), it could

be

flooded with too

much

gasoline.

Try pushing your accelerator pedal

all

the way to the

floor

and

holding

it

there as you

hold

the key in

START

for about three seconds.

If

the vehicle

starts

briefly but then stops again,

do

the

same

thing, but

this time keep the pedal down for five or

six

seconds.

This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.

After waiting

about

15

seconds, repeat

the

normal

starting procedure.

NOTICE:

Your

engine

is

designed

to

work with the

electronics

in

your vehicle.

If

you add electrical

parts

OF

accessories,

you

could change the

way

the engine operates. Before adding electrical

equipment, check with your dealer.

If

you

don’t,

your engine might not perform properly.

If

yon

ever have

to

have

your

vehicle towed,

see

the

past

of

this manual that tells how

to

do

it

without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing

Your Vehicle” in the Index.

In

very cold weather,

0

OF

(-

I

8

O

C)

or

colder, the engine

coolant

heater

can he8p. You’ll get easier starting

and

better fuel economy

during

engine wm-up.

Usually,

the

coolant

heater should

be

plugged

in

a

minimum

of

four

hours prior

to

starting your vehicle.

I_

-I

cigUTE[y%q

@

-.

..

b.8

Plugging

t.he

cord into an ungrounded outlet

could

cause

an

electrical shock. Also, the wrong

kind of extension cord could overheat and cause

a

fire.

You

could

be

seriously injured. Plug the

cord into

a

properly grounded three-prong

110-volt

AC

outlet.

If

the cord

won’t

reach, use

a

heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for

at least

15

amps.

4.

Before

starting

the

engine, be sure

to

unplug

and

store

the

cord

as

it

was

before

to

keep it

away

from

moving

engine

parts.

If

you

don’t, it could

be damaged.

Wow

long

shodd

YOU

keep the coolant heater

plugged

in?

The

answer depends

on

the outside temperature,

the

kind

of

oil

you

have,

and

some

other things.

Instead

of

trying

t~

list

everything

here,

we

ask

that

you

contact

your

dealer

in

the area where

you’ll

be

parking

pur

vehicle.

The

dealer

cm

give

you

the

best

advice

for

that

particdar area.

Y0mr

automatic

transaxle

has

a

shift

lever

located

on

the

steering

column.

There we several different positions

for

your

shift

lever.

PARK

(PI:

This

Bocks your

front wheels.

It’s

the

best

position

t~

we

when

YOU

start

your

engine because

pl~r

vehicle

can’t

move easily.

CAUTION:

I&

is

dangerous

to

get

out

of

your

vehick if

the

shift lever

is

not

fully

in

PARK

(P)

with

the

parking brake firmly set.

Your

vehicle

can

roll.

Don’t

leave your vehicle when the engine

is

running unless

you

have

to.

If

you have left

the

engine

running, the

vehicle can move suddenly.

You

or

others

could

be

injured.

TQ

be

sure

your

vehicle

won’t

move, even when you’re

on

fairly

level ground, always set

y0w

parking brake

and

move

the

shift

lever

to

PARK

(P).

See

‘“Shifting

Hnt~

PARK

(P)”

in

the

Index.

If

you’re

pulling

a

trailer,

see “Towing

a

Trailer”

in

the Index.

2-24

Ensure

the

shift lever

is

fuily

in

PARK

(PI

range

before

starting the engine.

Your

vehicle

has a

brake-transaxle

shift interlock.

You

have

to

fully

apply

your regular

brzkes

before

you

can shift

from

PARK

(P)

when the

ignition

key

is

in

RUN.

If

you

cannot

shift

out

of

PARK

(B),

ease

pressure

on

the shift

lever

--

push

the

shift

lever

all

the

way

into

PARK

(P)

as

you

rnaintain

brake

appiic~tion.

Then

move the

shift

lever into the

gear

you

wish. See “Shifting

Out

of

PARK

(E’)”

in

the Index.

REVERSE

(R):

Use

this

gear

to

back

up.

Shift

to

REVERSE

(R)

oanhy

after vehicle

To

rock

your

vehicle

back

and

forth

to

get

out

of

snow,

ice

sand

without

damaging

your

transaxle, see

“Stuck:

In

Sand,

Mud,

Ice

or

Snow”

in

the

Index.

NEUTRAL

(N):

In

this

position,

your

engim

doesn’t connect with the wheels.

To

restart when you’re

already

moving,

use

NEUTRAL

(N)

only.

Also,

use

NEUTRAL

(N)

when

your

vehicle

is

being

towed.

Shifting out of

PARK

(P)

or

NEUTRAL

fN)

while

your engine is “racing” (running

at

high speed)

is

dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the

brake pedal, your vehicle could move very

rapidly. You could lose control and hit people

or

objects. Don’t shift out

of

PARK

(P)

or

NEUTRAL

(N)

while your engine

is

racing.

1

NOTICE:

Damage

to

your transaxle caused by shifting out

of

PARK

(P)

or NEUTRAL

(N)

with the engine

racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

AUTOMATIC

OVERDRIVE

(@):This

positionis

for

normal

driving.

Pf

you need more power for

passing,

and

you’re:

Going

less than about

35

mph

(55

kmh),

push

your

accelerator pedal about halfway down.

e

Going about

35

mph

(55

kmh)

or

more,

push

the

accelerator

all

the

way down.

You’U

shift down

to

the

and

have more power.

THIRD

(3):

This

position

is

also

used for

normal

driving, however,

it

offers

more

power and Bower

fuel

economy

than

AUTOMATIC

OVERDRIVE

(0).

Here

are

some

times

you

might choose

THIRD

(3)

instead

of

AUTOMATIC

OVERDRIVE

(a):

Qb

When

towing

a

trailer,

so

there

is

less shifting

between gears,

or

SECQND

(2):

This

position

gives

you

nore power

but

lower fuel economy.

YQU

can use

SECOND

(2)

on

hills.

It

can

help control your speed

as

you

go

down

steep

mountain roads, but

then

you

would also want

to

use

your

brakes

off

and

on.

NOTICE:

Don’t

drive in SECOND

(2)

for

more than

5

miles

(8

km),

or

at speeds over

55

mph

(88

km/h),

or

you can damage

your

transaxle.

Use

AUTOMATIC

OVERDRIVE

(0)

or

THIRD

(3)

as

much

as

possible.

Don’t shift into SECOND

(2)

unless

you

are

going

slower than

65

mph

(105

km/h),

or

you

can

damage your engine.

When going

down

a

steep

hill.

FIRST

(I):

This

position

gives

you

even

more

power

(but

lower fuel economy)

than

SECOND

(2).

You

can

use

it

on very steep

hills,

or

in

deep

snow

or

mud.

If

the

selector

lever

is

put

in

FIRST

(

I

>,

the

transaxle

won’t

shift

into

first

gear

until

the vehicle

is

going

slowHy

enough.

If

your

hplrt

wheels

can’t

rotate,

don’t

try

to

drive.

This

might

happen

if

YOU

were

stuck

in

very

deep

sand

OF

mud

or

were

up

against

a

solid

object.

You

could

damage

your

transaxle.

Also,

if

you

stop

when

going

uphill, don’t

hold

your

vehicIe

there with only the accelerator

pedal. This

could

overheat

and

damage the

transaxle.

Use

ysur

brakes

or

shift into

BARK

(P)

Your

vehicle

has

a

PUSH

TO

RELEASE

parking

brake pedai.

To

set the

parking

brake,

hold

the

regular

brake

pedal

down

with

your

right

foot.

Push

down

the

papking

brake

pedal

with

your left foot.

~~ ~~

Whether

the

ignition

key

is

in

RUN

or

OFF.

the brake

system

wming

light

stays

on

while

the parking

brake

1s

set.

The

parhng

brake

uses

the

brakes

the

rear

wheels.

To

release the

parking

brake,

hoki

the

regular brake

pedal

down

and push

the

parking

brake pedal with

your

left foot. This will

unlock

the

pedal.

When

you

lift

your

left

foot,

the

parking

brzke pedal

will

foilow

it

to

the

release

position.

If you

try

to

drive (approximately

20

feet

(6.9

m))

with

the

parlkrng

brake on, the brake light stays on and

a

continuous chime

sounds

until you release the

parking

brake.

NOTICE:

Driving with the parking brake on can cause

your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to

replace them, and you could also damage other

parts

of

your vehicle.

If

you

are

towing

a

trailer

and

are parking

on

any

hill,

see “Towing

a

Trailer” in

the

Index.

That

part

shows

what

to

do

first

to

keep

the trailer from moving.

It

can be dangerous to get

out

of

your vehicle

if

the shift lever is not fully in

PARK

(P)

with the

parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

If

you have left the engine running,

the

vehicle can

move suddenly. You or others

could

be injured.

To

be sure

your

vehicle won’t move, even when

you’re on fairly level ground,

use

the steps that

follow.

If

you’re pulling

a

trailer, see “Towing

a

Trailer” in the Index.

1.

Hold the brake pedal down with

your

right foot

and

set

the parking brake.

2.

Move the

shift

lever into

?ARK

(B)

as

follows:

8

Pull

the

iever

toward

you.

Move the lever

up

as

far

as

it

will

go.

3.

Move the ignition key

to

LOCK.

4.

Remove the

key

and

take

it

with

you.

If

YOU

can

leave

your

vehicie

with

the

ignition

key

in

your

hand,

your

vehicle

is

in

PARK

(P).

~

It

can be dangerous

to

leave

YQW

vehicle with the

~

engine

running.

Your

vehicle could

move

i

suddenly

if

the shift lever

is

not

hlPy

in

PARK

(P)

with the

parking

brake

firmly

set.

And,

if

you

leave

the

vehicle

with

the

engine

running,

it

couk.€

overheat

and

even

catch fire.

YQU

or

others

could

be

injured. Don’t

leave

YOUK-

vehicle

with

the

engine

running

unless

you

have

to.

I

Hf

you

have

to

leave

your vehicle

with

the engine

running,

be

sure

your

vehick

is

in

PARK

(P)

and

your

parking

brake

is

firmly

set

before

you

Ieave

it.

After

you’ve

moved

the

shift

lever

into

the

?ARK

(P)

position,

hold

the regular

brake

pedal down. Then, see

if

YOU

can move the

shift

lever away

from

PARK

(?)

without first pulling it

toward

you.

If

you

can,

it

means

that

the shift lever wasn’t

fully

locked

into

PARK

(P).

r-m

naqae

Le!#&

I

If

you

are

parking

on

;I

hill

and

you

don’t

shift

your

transaxle

into

PAKM

(P)

properly,

the

weight

of

the

vehicle

may

put

too

rntich

force

OD

the parking

pawl

in

the

transaxle.

You

may

f’ind

it

difficult

to

pull

the

shift

lever out

of

PARK

(P).

This

is

called

“torque

lock.”

To

prevent torque

lock,

set

the

parking

brake and then

shift

into

PARK

(P)

pr~perfy before

you

leave

the

driver’s

seat.

TQ

find

out

how,

see

“Shifting

Into

PARK

(P)”

in

the Index.

When

you

are ready

to

drive, move the shift lever

out

of

PARK

(P)

bejbre

YOU

retease

the

parking brake.

If

torque

lock does occur,

you

may

need

to

have another

vehicle

push

yours

a

little

uphill

to

take

some

of

the

pressure

from

the

pxking

pawl

in

the

tramaxle,

so

you

can

pull,

the

shiR

lever out

of

PARK

(P).

k;zgaA

'T:..:&pa:

&

LnP

:V3;.,,t

(.$

dL

Bb*

pFq-

{p\

:.A

AA

&L

\'&

J

Your vehicle

has

a

brake-transaxle shift interlock.

You

have to fully

apply

your regular brake

before

you can

shift

from

PARK

(P)

when the ignition is

in

RUN.

See

"Automatic Transaxle" in the Index.

If

you

cannot

shift out

of

PARK

(PI, ease pressure

on

the shift lever

--

push

the shift 'lever all the way

into

PARK

(PI

as

you

maintain brake application. Then

move the shift lever into the gear

YOU

want.

If

you

ever

hold

the

brake pedal down but

still

can't

shift

out

of

PARK

(P),

try

this:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Turn

the

key

to

OW.

Open and close the driver's

door to turn

off

the retained accessory power feature.

Apply

and

hold the brake

until

the end

of

Step

4.

Shift

to

NEUTRAL

(N).

Start the vehicle and then shift

to

the drive gear

you

want.

Have the vehicle

fixed

as

soon

as

you

can.

CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust

parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don't park

over papers, leaves,

dry

grass or other things that

can burn.

..

.

..

3

32

drn-2

Engine exhaust can

kill.

It contains the gas

carbon monoxide

(CO),

which

you

can’t see or

smell.

It

can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:

0

e

Your

exhaust system sounds strange

or

different.

Your vehicle

gets

rusty underneath.

Your

vehicle

was

damaged in

a

collision.

YQUS

vehicle was damaged when driving

over

high

points

on

the

road

or

over

road debris.

Repairs weren’t

done

correctly.

Your

vehicle

or

exhaust

system

had been

modified improperly.

If

you ever suspect exhaust

is

coming into

your vehicle:

Drive it only with all the windows down to

Q

Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

blow

out

any

CQ;

and

It’s

better not

to

park

with

the engine

running.

3118

if

you

ever have

to,

here are

some

things

to

know.

Idling the engine with the climate control

system

off

could sallow dangerous exhaust into

YOME-

vehicle (see the earlier Caution under

“Engine Exhaust”).

Also,

idling

in

a

closed-in place

can

let

deadly

carbon

momxide

(CO)

into

your

vehicle even

if

the

fan

switch

is

at

the

highest

setting.

One

place

this can happen

is

a

garage. Exhaust

--

with

CO

--

can

come

in

easily.

NEVER

park in a

garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in @ace can be

a

blizzard. (See

“Blizzard”

in

the

Index.)

I&

can

be dangerous to get

ut

of

your

vehicle

if

the

shift

lever

is

not

fully in

PARK

(PI

with

the

parking

brake firmly set. Your vehicle can

roll.

Don’t leave your

vehicle

when the engine

is

running

unless you

have

to.

If

you’ve left the

engine

mnnhg,

the

vehicle

can

BP~QV~

suddenly.

You

or

others

could

be injured.

To

be

sure

YOW

vehicle

won’t

move, even when you’re

OEI

fairly

level ground,

always

set your parking

brake

and

move the

shift

lever to

PARK

(PI.

H701Iow the proper steps

to

be sure your vehicle

won’t

move. See

“Shifting

Into

PARK

(P)”

in

the Index.

If

YOU

are parking

on

a

hill

and

if

you’re pulling

a

trailer,

also

see “Towing

a

Trailer” in the Index. Switches

on

the

driver’s mest conltrol.each

of

the

windows while the

ignition

is

on or retained accessory

power

is

active.

In

addition, each passenger

door

has

a

switch for its own window.

2-33

The switch for the driver’s window has

an

express-down

feature. Pull the switch back all the way, release it and

the window will lower automatically.

To

stop

the

window

from

lowering, pull the switch again.

To

partially open the window, pull the switch back

half

way. When the switch

is

released, the window will stop

moving.

To

raise the window, press

and

hold the

switch

forward.

Press the window lock switch

on

the driver’s armrest to

disable dl passenger window switches,

or

just

the rear

passenger switches.

The

middle

of

the

switch will light

to

indicate

thc

window

lockout

is

active.

The

diver’s

window

corat.rds

will

slill

be

operable.

This

is

a

useful

fwture

when

you

have children

as

passengers.

Press

the windcw

lock

switch

a

second time to

ailow

passengers to use their window controls

again.

The

light

in the center

of

the switch will

go

off

to

indicate that

the

feature

is

disabled.

Vehicles are delivered programed

to

Bock

out

all

passenger windows.

If

you

have the optional

DK,

you

can choose

to

lock

out

only

the rea- windows. See

“Personal Choice Features” or “Driver Information

Center’’ in the Index for programming instructions.

If

you

do not have the

DIC

feature,

see

your dealer

if

YOU

choose

to

have this setting changed

to

lock out only

the

rear windows.

Nearly the entire surface

of

the center pad

of

the

steering wheel is an active horn switch. Press anywhere

on

the

pad

to

sound the

horn.

A

tilt steering wheel allows

you

to

adjust the steering

wheel before

you

drive.

You

can

also

raise

it

to

the highest level

to

give

your

legs more

room

when

you

exit

and enter the vehicle.

To

tilt

the

wheel, hold the steering wheel

and

pull

the

lever

toward

you.

Move

the

steering wheel

to

a

comfortable

position,

then release the

Iever

to lock the

wheel

in

piace.

a

.

. . . . . .

.

. .

.

.,.>:<<.:

The lever

on

the

left

side

of

the

steering

column

includes

YOGI-:

e

Turn

Signal

and

Lane

Change

Indicator

Headlamp

PIighLow

Beam

Changer

0

Windshield Wipers

and

Washer

Cruise

Control

Flash-to-Pass

...

.

....

v

The

turn

signal has

two

upward

(for

right)

and

two

downward

(for

left)

positions.

These

pcsitions

aIbw

you

to

signal

a

turn

or

m.

Iarae

change.

To

signal a

mrn,

move

the

lever

all

the

way

up

or

down.

Wnen

the

turn

is

hished,

the

lever will

return automatically.

pane!

will

flash

in

the

direction

cf

the

turn

OF

lane

change.

Hf

your

vehicle

is

equipped

with

the

Head-Up

will

also

apex

in

the

display

area

to

indicate

the

directim

of

the

turn

or

lane

change.

Display

(HUD),

an

mow

E

a

bulb

is

burned out,

replace

it

to

help avoid

itr~

accident.

If

the mows

don’t

go

on

at

all

when

you

signal

a

turn,

check the €use

(see

“‘Fuses

md

Circuit

Breakers”

in

the

Index)

and

f~r

burned-out

bulbs.

If

you

have

a

trailer

towing

option

with

added wiring

for

the

trailer

lamps,

the

signal

indicator

will

flash

even

if

a

turn

signal

bulb

is

burned

aut. Check

the

front

and

rea

turn

signal

lamps

regularly

to

make

sure

they

are

workirzg.

Note: You

do

not

need

to

add

a

different

Basher.

If

your

turn

signal

is

left

on

~CZ

more

than

3/4

of

a

mile

(1.2

h),

a

chime

will

sound

ai

each

flash

of

the

turn

signal.

To

turn

df

the chime,

move

the

turn

signal

lever

to

the

dTposition.

When

the

high

beams

are

on,

a

light

the instrdment

panel

wiil

~SQ

be

on.

if

This

feztuse

lets

you use

your

high-beam headlamps

to

signal

a

driver in

front

of

you

that

you

want

to

pass.

It

works

even if

your

headamps

xe

3ff.

To

use

it,

pull

the

turn

signal

lever

toward

you,

but

not

so

far

that

you

hear

a

click.

If

your

headlamps are

off

or

on

low

beam,

your

high-beam

headlamps will

turn

on.

They’ll

stay

QPI

as

long as

you

hold

the Iever toward you

and

the

high-beam indicator

on

the

dash

will

come

on.

Release

the

Iever

to

turn

the

high-beam

headlamps

off.

L~

,...

.e...

. i.

:

.

:.:.

.:.

.

...

. .

You

control

the

windshield wipers by turning the

band

marked

WIPER.

For

a

siagle wiping cycle,

turn

the band

to

MIST.

HoId

it these until

the

wipers

start,

them let

go.

The wipers

will

stop after

one

cycle.

If

YOU

want more cycles,

hold

the

band

on

MIST

longer.

You

can

set

the

wiper speed

for

a

long

or

short

delay

between wipes.

This

can

be

very

useful

in

light rain

OH

snow.

Turn

the

band

to

choose

the

delay time. The

closer

to

LO,

the shorter

the

delay

between wipes.

For steady wiping at

low

speed,

turn

the

band

away

from

you

to

the

LO

position.

For

high-speed

wiping,

turn

the

band

further,

io

HI.

To stop

the wipers,

move

the

band

to

OFF.

Remember

that

damaged wiper

biades

may prevent

you

from

seeing

well

enough

to

dive

safely.

TO

avoid

damage, be sure

to

clear

ice and snow

from

the wiper

blades before

using

them.

Hf

they're frozen

to

the

windshield, carefully loosen

or

thaw them.

If

your

blades become damaged, get s,ew blades

or

Made

inserts.

Heavy

snow

or

ice

can

overload

your

wiper

motor.

A

circuit

breaker

wid

stcp

rhe motor

until

it cools. CBeu

away

snow

OF

ice

to

prevent

an

overload.

.........

...

.............

band

to

a

higher sensitivity level.

An

initial wipe occurs when

you

turn

the

ignition

on

as

a

reminder

that

the

rain

sense feature

is

active.

The

moisture-sensing wipers

cperate

in

a

deizy mode

as

well

as

a

continuous

low

or

high

sped,

depending

on

5ie

mount

of

moisture

on

the

windshield

and

the.

sensitivity

setting.

Tne

IWST

and

wash

cycles operate

as

nomd

and

=e

not

effected

by

the

moisture-sensing

function.

NOTICE:

The

moisture-sensing

system

is

activated

by

turning

the

wiper

controi

band

to

one

of

the

five

sensitivity levels

within

the

DELAY

area.

The

DELAY

position

closest

ts

OWMIST

is

the

lowest sensitivity

setting.

This

aiIows

more

water

to

coliect

on

the

windshield between wipes.

It

is

important

to

note

that

the

moisture-sensing delay

wiping feature can be ovenidden

at

any

time

by

manually turning the wiper

band

to

LO

OF

WH

speed.

If

the

windshield

on

your vehicle

ever

needs

replacement, make sure that the

new

windshieid

is

moisture-sensing delay compatible.

If

your

vehicle

is

equipped with

a

DE@,

a

WINDSHELD

WASHER

FLUID

LOW

message

will

appear

on

the

display

when

the vehicle is

low

on

washer

fluid.

With

cruise contrd,

you

can

rnaintain

a

speed

of

about

25

mpk

(40

kh)

OP

more

without

keeping

YQW

foot

on

the

accelerator.

This

can

really

help

on

long

trips.

Cmise

control does

not

work

at

speeds

below

about

25

mph

(40

krdh).

I

If

your

vehicle

is

ia

cruise

control

when

the

optional

traction

control

system

begins

to

limit

wheel

spin,

the

cruise

control

will

automatically

disengage.

(See

"Traction

Control

System"

in

the

Index.)

When

road

conditions

zilow

YOS to

safely

use

it

again,

you

may

turn

the

cmise

control

back

QS.

;:::::?.

.::.:.:.:>

......

<:::::y::&

::

...

..:..

..........

...

.-.z,-.-.

.

:.:.:".:"-.

..................

5.'.

.*.:--.

..

:.:.:.:.x.:.>:...:.

.....................

3

.........

2.

Get

to

the

speed

you

want.

3.

Push

in

the

SET

button

at

the end

of

the

lever

and

release

it.

Tne

CRUISE

light

QII

the

..........

4.

Thke

your

foot

of€

the accelerator

pedai.

..:,:?

.

,:?

..

.‘:I

....

e

Use the accelerator

pedal

to

go

XI

a

higher

the

end

of

the lever, then

release

the

button

and

the

accelerator Dedal.

.................

.........

.......

:.:<.:m,x..x.:.xe&%e&

speed.

Push

the

button

at

0

iMove

the cxtse switch

ON

to

WA.

EsM

it

there

untii

you

reach

a

desired

speed

and

then

release

the switch.

To

increase

your

speed

in

very

small

amounts,

move the switch

to

WA

for

less

than

half

a

second

an6

then release

it.

Each time

you

cis

this,

your

vehicle

will

go

about

B

mph

(1.6

kmh)

faster.

The accelerate feature

will

only

work

after

you

have

set the cruise

controi

speed

by

pusbing

the

SET

button.

/

@

The

headlamp

switch

is

off

and

GD

The

transaxle is

not

in

PARK

(PI.

Whew

it’s

dark

enough outside, your high-$em

headlamps will change

to

low-beam headlamps

at

full

brightness.

The

other lamps that turn with

your

headlamps will

also

turn

on.

When it’s bright enough

outside, the regular

Imps

will

turn

off,

and your

high-beam headlamps change

to

the

reduced brightness

Qf

DWL.

To

turn

off

all

exterior lighting at

night

when

YOU

are

parked,

tlrm

off

the

headlamps

and

move the twilight

sentinel

~ontd

to

the

left

into

the

detent in

the

slider

control. When released, the control

will

return

to

the

Twilight Sentinel minimum

delay

position and the fights

will

turn

off.

As

with

any

vehicle,

YOU

should

turn

on

the regular

headlamp system

when

YOU

need it.

To

operate this feature, slide

the control

to

any

position

to

vary the

lamp

timeout.

If

you

move

the

control

a11

the

way

to

MAX,

your

lamps

will

remain

on

for

three minutes after

you

turn

off

your

engine.

If

you

move the control

almost

all

the

way

in

the

other

direction,

so

it’s

just

on,

the

Imps

will

go

off

quickly

when

you

turn

off

your engine.

You

cm set this

delay time

from

only

a

few seconds

to

thee

lminutes.

YQU~

twilight sentinel

and

daytime

running

lamps

work

with

the

Bight sensor on

top

of

the instrument panel.

Don’t cover it

up-

If

you

do

it

will read

“dark”

and

the

headlamps

will

come

on.

This

feature

d.kows

€os

a

three

to

five-second

fade

out

of

the

courtesy

lamps

instead

of

inmediate

turn

off%.

This

feature

will

only be activated when the security

feedback feature

is

programmed

to

be

in

Modes

1,3

or

5

on

the trmsmitter. Modes

0,

2

and

4

do

not

respond

with

exterior

lights

Washing

when

uirlocking

the

vehicle

so

perimeter lighting will

nct

be active.

This feature can be programmed

on

or

off

for

each transmitter.

To

turn

the feature

off:

1.

Press

and

hold

LOCK

on

the

door

lock

switch

QII

the

door

throughout

this

procedure. All doors will

lock.

2.

Press

the

instant

dam

button

on

the transmitter

to

enter

tihe

programming mode. Perimeter lighting

remains

on

at

this

time and the

~QIX

will

chirp

two

times.

3.

Press

the

instant

alam

button

on

fhe

key

transmitter

again.

Perizneter

lighting

is

disabled and the

horn

wiEI

chirp

one time.

4.

Release

the

door

lock

switch. The perimeter

iighting

Pressing the

UNLOCKbutton

repeatedly

may

caw

the

To

turn

the feature

on:

feature

is

now

off.

back-up

lamps

to

turn

on.

I.

2.

3.

4.

Press and

hold

LOCK

on

the

door lock switch

on

the

door throughout

this

procedure.

A11

doors

will

Bock.

Press the

instant

alm

button

on

the

key

transmieter

to

enter the

programming

mode.

Perimeter lighting

remains

off

at this time

and

the

horn

will chirp

one

time.

Press the instant

alm

button

0n

the

transmitter

again. Perimeter lighting is now enabled

and

the

horn

will chirp

two

times.

Release

the

door

lock

switch. The perimeter lighting

feature

is

~QW

on.

Perimeter iighting

can

also

be activated through the

optional Driver Infomation Center

(DHC).

See

“Personal Choice Features”

or

“Driver Infomation

Center” in the Index.

..-.

. .

.

....

inte~ior courtesy lamps

will

come

To

turn

QHP

a rear seat reading

lap,

press the switch

do~r.

They

will

turn

off

when you

above

that

rear door.

To

turn

cpff

the

reading

lap,

press

the switch again.

When

you open

the

glove

box,

a

lamp

will on

inside the glove box.

This

will

automatically

turn

off

I

when

the

glove

box

is

closed.

This

feature

shuts

off

dl

lamps

that

are

left

on

for

more

than

144

minutes

when

the

ignition

is

off.

This

will keep

your

battery

from

running

down.

When

you

are sitting in

a

comfortable driving

position,

adjust

the

mimr

SO

you

can see clearly

behind

your

vehicle.

Grip

the

mirror

in the center

to

move

it

up

OF

down

and

side

to

side.

The

day/night

adjustment

dlows

YOU

Eo

adjust

the

Ilnissoff

to

avoid

glare

from

the

kmps

behind you. Pull the

tab

forward

for

daytime

use;

push

it

back

for

night

use.

..............................................................

.......................................................

::

............

....................................

............................

i

......

...

....

..........

....

...

..............

...

At

night,

when

the

glare

is

too

high,

the

mirror

will

gradually

daken

to

reduce

glare

(this

change

may

take

a

few seconds). The

mirror

will

return

to

its

clex

daytime

state

when

t,~

glare

is

reduced.

The

automatic

minor

has

a

time

delay

feature

which

prevents

unnecessary

switching

from

the

night

back

to

the

day

position.

This

delay prevents rapid

changing

of

the

mirror

as

you

drive

under

lights

and

t3E.ough

traffic.

Ywr

vehicle

may

have

m

electrochromic inside

r~wview

minor

with

a

compass.

When

set

in

the

JMIRROR

position,

this

mirror

automatically changes to reduce glare

fkom

headamps

behind you.

A

time

delay feature prevents rapid

changing

from

the day

to

night

positions

while driving

under lights and through

traffic.

The

mirrcpa:

also

includes

m

eight-point

compass

display

in

the

upper

right

CQH~W

of

the

mirror

face. men

on,

the

compass

automatically

calibrates

as

the

vehicle

is

driven.

When cleaning the

naimor,

use

a

gaper towel

or

similar

materid

dampened

with

glass

cleaner.

Do

not spray

glass cleaner directly

on

the

mirror

as

that

may

cause

the

liquid

cleaner

to

enter the

minor

housing.

Use

a

cotton

swab

and

glass cleaner

to

clean the ph~toce~~s

whew necessary.

Press the

COMPASS

switch

once

to

turn

the

compass

on

Or

Sff.

if,

after

two

SecoCds,

the

display

does

not

show

a

cornpass

heading

(“N9

for

NQI-~K,

~QP

example),

there

may

be

a

strong

magnetic

field

interfering

with

the

compass. Such interference

may

be

caused

by

a

magnetic

antenna

ETP,QUYB~,

magnetic note

pad

holder

or

a

similar magcetic

item.

mr

ine

minor

is

set

in

zone

eight

upon

leaving

the

kctory

It

will

be

necessa-y

tc

adjust

the

compass

to

compensate

for compzss variance

if

you

live

outside

zone

eight.

Under

certain

circumstances,

as

during

a

long

distance

cross-country

trip,

it

wiHi

be necessary

to

adjust

~QI-

compass variance. Compass variance

is

the

difference

between

earth’s

magnetic

north

and

true geographic

north.

If

not

adjusted

to

account

for

compass

variance,

your

compass

could give

false

readings.

3.

Press

the

COMPASS

button

on

the

bottom

of

the

minor

until

the

new

zone

number

appears

in

the

display.

After

you

stop

pressing

the

button,

the

display

will

shcw

a

compass

direction

within

a

few

seconds.

(This

is

the

automatic

calibration

mode.

Drive

in

a

circle to calibrate

the

mirror.

See

“Compass

Calibration”

following.)

:~~~~;~~~~

.QEbT&GR

If

the

letter

T9’

shsuM

ever appear

in

tire

compass

window,

the

mirror may

need calibration.

The

mirror

can

be calibrated

in

one

of

two

ways:

Drive

the

vehicle

in

circles

at

5

mph

(8

knm/ha)

or

less

until

the

display

reads

a

direction,

OF

@

Drive the vehicle

on

your

everyday

routine.

Move

the

switch

below

the control

to

choose

the

right

or

left

minr.

If

yoir

place

the

switch

in

the

center

positicn,

no

movement

of

the mirror

will

occur.

To

adjust

the

minor,

push

the

mow

control

in

the

direction

you

want

the

minor

to

g~.

E€

you

have

the

optional

BK

fe'eaturc,

the

passenger's

outside

rerarview

mir-ror

a€ss

includes

a

tilt-down

feature

that

operates

wlxn

the

shift

lever

is

in

REVERSE

fR).

When the vehicle

is

shifted

out

of

REVERSE

(Rj,

:he

passenger

mirror

will

return

to

its

original

position

after

a

five second

delay.

This

deilry

prevcnts

moven~ent

of

the

mirror

if

multiple gear transitions (reverse

to

drive

to

reverse) occur

during

a

parailel

parking

maneuver.

'Fimis

feature

can

be

programed

on

or

off

though

the

Personal Choice selection

mem.

See '"Driver

Information

Center"

or

"Personal

Choice

Features"

in

the

Index for

programming

instr~cbons.

This

feature

assists

the driver

with

improved

rear

obstacle detection.

Your passenger's

side

mirror

is convex.

A

convex

mirror's surface

is

curved

SO

you

can see more

from

the

driver's seat.

I.

Pusla

the

extended

tab

(above

the

GARAGE

button)

or insert

a

screwdriver between

the

tab

and

outer

edge

of

the

cover.

"he

garage

door opener cover

will

flip

down.

I-

ii

N

EAR

~

MULTIELMAC

SEARS

I

9553708

1

2

SHlMA

1

RT-18

1

4

I

3

STANLEY

h

1047

1

!

5

B

3

I

STANLEY

1

1050

1

:

'

STANLEY

1

?076

1

6

3

I

6

3

I

1

i

121

6

I

3

3.

Place the height adapters on the proper peg using the

suggested combinations

or

by lining

up

the height

adapters

and

the

transmitter button

on

your

garage

door opener.

,5

6

7

4.

use

&e

Velcro@

found

in

the storage area

attach the garage door opener securely inside the

console.

Line

up the

transmitter

button with the

height adapters.

You

may

have

a

fold-down

mest

between the

front

seats that opens into

a

storage area.

To

open it,

pull

up

QII

the

lever

at

the fiont edge.

Inside

are cupholders

that

can be rotated

forward

for

use with

the

mest cover

closed. There

is

also

a removable

coinholder

and

a

storage

area

for

cassette tapes and compact

discs.

5.

Close the cover and test the

G-GE

button.

If

your garage door opener doesn’t work

afkr

it

is

installed,

try

another combination.

YQW

vehicle’s rear seat

armrest

may

c~nt~na

two

cuphokkrs.

To

access

elhe

cupholders, pull

tke

mest

down

from

the

rear

seatback.

Some

models

may

also

include a

storage

area

inside

the

mest.

To

open

it,

pull

up

on

the lever at the

front

edge

of

the

armrest.

The

console

dso

contains

a

removeable

coinholder

as

well

as

storage

for

cassette

tapes

and

compact discs.

Your

vehicle is equipped with

2

rear

storage mrest

with

a

pass through feature

that

allows

for

tmnk

access.

Pull

the rear armrest

down,

then

push

down

on

the

trunk

access panel latch

to

open the panel.

To

close, push the

access panel

until

it

Iatches.

YQUT

vehicle

has

a convenience net.

You'll

see

it

just

inside

the

bzck

wall

sf

the

trunk.

Put

small

loads,

like

grocery

bags,

behind the

net.

It

can

help

keep

them from

f'rrlling

over

during

sharp turns

or

quick

starts

and

stops.

The

net

isn't

for

Earger, heavier

loads.

Store

them

in

the

mnk

as

far

forwrtrd

as

you

can.

You

can

unhook

the net

so

that

it

will

lie

flat

when

you're

not

using

it.

The

front ashtray may be removed

for

cleaning.

To

remove, grasp the sides

and

pull

forward.

The rear ashtrays

are

located

on

each rear door panel.

To

remove the rear ashtray, open the lid

and

ease the

ashtray

Kpward

until the edge can be grasped

to

pull

the

ashtray

up

and

out.

1

NOTICE:

Don't

put

papers

or

other flammable things into

your

ashtrays.

Hot

cigarettes

or

other

smoking

materials

could

ignite

them,

causing a

damaging

fire.

Your

vehicle

has

ifluraminated

visor

vanity

mirrors.

When

you

open

the

visor

vanity

mirror

by

prrlling

up,

the

lamps

turn

on.

The

brightness

of

the

laps

can

be

adjusted

by

siiding

the

switch.

Your

vehicle

may

also

have

visor

vanity

nirrors

for

the

rear

seat

passengers.

T0

block

out

glare, swing

down

the

visors. The

larger

SUI

visor

can

be

removed

from

the center

mot;nt

and

moved

to

the

side,

while

the

auxiliary

sun visor

remains

to

Mock

game

from

the

front.

The

front

side

of

the

driver's

sun

visor

also

contains

a

pocket

for

map

storage.

YQW

vehicle

may

have

one

or

two

power

outlets

depending

on

the type

of

front

seat

YOU

have.

If

your

fr~~t

seat

has

a

f~ld-down

mest,

the

power

crrtlet

is

located

in

the

center

of

the

front

seat

bebw

the

cushion.

If

your

vehicle

has

front

bucket

seats

with

a

center

console,

you

will

find

one

outlet

inside

the storage

compartment

and

the

other

OR

the lower

fro~t

edge

of

the

console.

For

~UI.

conveaience,

ym

will

find

a

two-hanger

capacity

garment

hook

above each rear

door

near

the

reading

laxps.

This

system

may

be

ordered

if

you

have the

optional

fixed ce1Ma.r telephone. The following services

are

avdable

24

hours

a day:

8

Roadside Service with Location

Emergency

Services

Button

8)

Remote

Door

Unlock

a

Theft

Detection/Noti€icatisn and Stolen-Vehicle

Tracking

8

Automatic Notification

of

Air

Bag

Deployment

e

Corrcierge/Customer Conveniences Services

For

more

information, contact your dealer.

If

you have

the

express-open

~S~PQUIQ~

option, the switch

is

opr

the

roof

between the

sun

visors.

It

will open

the

~S~TOFOO~

when

in

retained

accessory

power

or

when the

ignition

is

on.

'Ih

close

the

glass

panel,, press

and

hold

the switch

fwwad.

The

sunshade must be manually closed.

Once

the

astroroof

is

closed, it can be opened

to

a

vent

position. Push the switch upward

to

vent.

To

close, pull

the

switch downward. The sunshade must be opened

and

closed

manually

for vent operation.

An

assist strap over each rear door

and

the

frorat

passenger's door can be used to help you get

in

or out

of

your vehicle.

It

will

operate garage

doors

and

gates,

or

other devices

controlled

by

radio

frequency

such

as

ltnome/office

lighting

systems.

The

transmitter will

Hem

and

transmit

the

frequencies

of

most

current transmitters

and

is

powered

by

your

vehicIe’s battery

and

charging

system.

This

device

complies

with

?art

B

5

of

the

FCC

Rieles.

Operation is subject

to

the

following

two

conditions:

(I

1

this device

may

not

cause

hmfui

interference,

and

(2)

this

device must accept any interference

received, including interference

that

may

cause

undesired operation.

This device c~mplies with

RSS-218

of

Industry

Canada.

Operation

is

subject

to

the

following two

conditions:

(i

)

this

device

may

not cause interference.

and

(2)

this

device

must

accept

my

interference, including

interference

that

may

cause undesired operation

of

the

device.

Changes

and

modifications

to

this

system

by

other

than

an

authorized service hcility

c~uhd

void

authorizization

to

rase this equipment.

Your vehide’s engine

should

be

turned

off

while

programming

your transmitter.

Fdlow

these

steps

to

program

up

to

three

channels:

2.

HoId

the

end

of

your

hand-held transmitter

against

the

bottom surface

of

the

universal

transmitter

so

that

you

can

stir1

see

the

red

light.

3.

4.

Decide which

one

of

the three channels

YOU

want

to

program.

Using

both hands, press the

hand-held

transmitter

bdtton

and the desired

button

on

the

universal

transmitter.

Continue to

hold

both buttons

though

Step

4.

Wold down

both

buttons

until

YQU

see the red Bight

QII

the universal

trmsmitter

first

flash

S~OW~Y,

<ken

rapidly.

The

rapid

flashirpg,

which could take

up

to

90

seconds,

indicates

that the universal transmitter

has been programmed. Release

both

buttons once the

light StmS

tQ

fhSh

KiPidly.

If

you

have trouble programming the universal

transmitter,

make

sure that

YOU

have followed the

directions exactly

as

described and that the batteries in

the hand-l.aeld transmitter

are

not

dead.

If

you

still

cannot program

it,

rotate

YQUT

hand-held transmitter end

over end

and

try

again.

ne

universal transmitter may

not

be

compatible

with

a limited

number

of

dder

installaaions due

to

legislated changes

in

transmission

frequencies.

If

you

cannot

program the transmitter after

repeated attempts, consult your dealer.

Be

sue

to

keep

your

~higind

hmd-held transmitter

in

cse

you

need

t~

erase

and

reprogram

the

miversd

transmitter.

Note

to

Canadfiraa

owners:

During

prograMng,

your

hand-heid transmitter may

stop

transmitting

after

one

or

two

seconds.

If

you

are

programming

from

one

of

these

transmitters,

YOU

should press

and

re-press

the

button

on

the hand-held transmitter every

:WO

seconds

without

ever releasing the

button

QII

the universal

tra~ni~ter.

Release

both

buttons

when

the

red light

on

the universal

transmitter begins

to

flash rapidly.

Press

and

hold

the

appropriate

button

QHZ

the universal

transmitter. The

red

light

comes

on

while the signal

is

being transmitted.

Note that

the

ef€ective transmission range

of

the

universal transmitter may

differ

from

your

hand-held

trmsmitter

and

from

one channel

to

another.

2-68

To

dete,mine

if

your

garage

door

opener

has

this

rolling

code

feature, press 2nd

hold

the appsoprizte

button

on

the universal transmitter that

was

programmed.

If

the

sed

light

flashes

rapidly

for

one

to

two

seconds, then

turns

solid,

your

garage

door

opener

has

this

feature.

To

program

a

garage

door

opener

with

the rolling

code

feature,

do

the fdowirag:

8.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Program your hand-heid transmitter

to

the universal

transmitter

by

foilowing

the steps

provided

under

“’Programming

the

Transmitter” earlier.

Loczte the training button

on

the

garage

door

opener

receiver. The exact location

and

coIor

will

vary

among

brands. Refer

to

your

garage Coor

opener

irranufacturer’s owner’s manual to

Iocate

the

training biataorz.

Press

the

trainiEg button

on

the garage

door

opener

receiver

for

one

to

two

seconds.

Retrrnr

to your vehicle

and

press the programmed

button on

the

universal

transmitter

until

the

red

light

Rashes

rapidly

(about

two

seconds).

Release the button, then press

it

again

to

confirm

it

was

programed

to

the garage

door

opener receiver.

You

may

WOW

use either the

universal

transmitter

or

the

hmd-held transmitter

t~

open your garage door.

If

you

still

have

diEiculty

in

programming and require

assistance, please call

your

dealer.

Accessoiles for

your

universal

transmitter

are available

from

the

manufacturer

of

the unit.

Ilf

you

would

Hike

additional

infomation,

piease

call

1-800-355-35

15.

Your vehicle

is

equipped with

one

of

the

following instrument

panel

clusters.

It

includes

indicator

waning

lights

and

gages that

are

explained

on

the

following

pages.

Be

sure

to

read

about

those

that

apply

to

the

instrument

cluster for

your

vehicle.

-

130

'

140

Standard

CEuster

(United

States

version

shown,

Canada

similar)

TEMPERATURE

Cluster

With

DIC

(United

States

version

shown,

Canada

similar)

The

tachometer tells

you

how

fast

the engine

is

running.

it

displays

engine

speed

in

thousands

sf

~CVQIU~~OIX

per

minute

(rp”).

This

part

describes the warning lights

and

gages that

may be

on

your vehicle. The pictures will help

YOU

locate them.

Warning lights

and

gages

can

signal that something

is

wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an

expensive repair

or

replacement. Paying attention

to

your warning

lights

and

gages coukl also save you or

others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is a

problem with one

of

your

vehicle’s

hn~tions.

As

YOU

will

see

in

the details

010.

the next few pages, some

warning lights come on briefly when

you

start the

engine

just

to

let

you

know

they’re working.

If

you

are

familiar with

tis

section,

YOU

should

not be alarmed

when this happens.

Cages can indicate when there may

be

or

is

a

problem

with of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages

and

warning

lights

work together

to

let

you

how

when

there’s a problem

with

your

vehicle.

When one

of

the warning lights comes

QII

and

stays

on

when you are driving, or when one

of

the gages

shows

there

may

be

a

problem, check the section

that

tells you

what

to

do

about it. Please

follow

this

manual’s

advice.

Waiting to

d~

repairs can

be

costly

--

and

even

dangerous.

So

please get to how your warning lights

and

gages. They’re

a

big

help.

Your

vehicle

may

also

have

a

driver

information

system

that

works along with the warning lights

and

gages. See

“Driver Information System”

in

the

Index.

d

Bel$

pj&&n(jgp

Light

When eke key

is

turned

to

RUN

or

START,

a

chime will

come on

for

about

eight seconds

to

remind people

to

fasten their safety belts,

unless

the

driver’s

safety belt is

already buckled.

The

safety

belt light will

also

come

on

md

stay on

for

about

20

seconds, then it

will

flash

for

about

55

seconds.

If

the driver’s

belt

is

already buckled,

neither the chime nor the

light will come on.

There is

an

air

bag

readiness light

on

the instrument

panel, which shows AIR

BAG.

The system checks the

air

bag’s electrical system

for

rna’rfunctions. The light

tells you

if

there

is

an

electrical problem. The system

check includes the air

bag

sensors, the air

bag

modules,

the

wiring

and

the

crash sensing and diagnostic

module.

For

more

infomation

on

the air bag system,

see

“Air

Bag”

in

the

Index.

This

light

will come on

when

y~u

start your engine,

and

it

will

flash

for

a

few

seconds.

Then

the Eight

should

go out.

This

means

the system is ready.

I€

the air bag readiness light stays on after you start

the

engine or comes

QIT

when

you

are

driving,

your

air bag

system may

not

work p~operly. Have your vehicle

serviced right away.

The

air

bag

readiness light

should

flash

for

a

few

seconds when you

turn

the

ignition key

to RUN.

If

the

light doesn’t come

on

then,

have

it

fixed

so

it

will

be

ready

to

wm you

if

there

is

a

problem.

VOLT

“‘en

you

turn

the

hey

to

RUN,

this

light

will

come

on

briefly,

to

show

the

battery

charging

systeE

is

working.

When

the light goes

off

and

stays

off,

the

charging

system

is

working.

Hf

the

light

stays

on,

a

chime

will

sound

indicating

you

need service,

and

you

should

take your vehicle

to

the

dealer at once.

To

save your battery

until

yo3

get

there,

turn

off

a%B

accessories

and

turn

off

glow

climate

control

system.

When

a

luge number

of

electrical

accessories

me

operating

ir,

the vehicle

and

the engine

is

left

at

an

idle

for

aa

extended period, the engine may

idle

at

a

higher

RPM

than noma1

to

ensure the battery

does

not

mn

down.

This

may occur when several

of

the

following

are

on:

parking

lamps,

high-beam headlamps, rear

window

defogger, heated seats

and

engine cooling

fans,

etc.

It

may take longer

for

the rear

window

defogger

to

dear

the

glass,

and

the heated

seats

may

not

feel

as

warn

as

normal.

This

light

should

come

on

whera

YOU

turn

the key

to

RUN.

If

it doesn’t come

ora

then,

have

it

fixed

so

Et

will

be

ready

to

warn

you

if

there‘s

2

problem.

With

the anti-lock brake

system, the

Iight(s)

will

come

on

when

you

start

your engine

and

may

stay

on

for

several seconds.

1

That’s

BzorfnaI.

The

anti-lock

brake system

warning

light

should

come

on

briefly

when

YOU

turn the

ignition

key

to

RUN.

If

the

light

doesn’t come

on

then,

have

it

fixed

SO

it

will be

ready

to

wm

you

if

there

is

a

problem.

OFF

This

warnirag

light

should

come on briefly

2s

you start

the

engine.

If

the

warning

iight

doesn’t

corne

on

then,

have

it

fixed

so

it

will

be

ready

to

warn you

if

there’s

a

problem.

If

it

stays

on,

or

comes

on

when

you’re driving, there

may

be a problem with your

traction

control

system

and

your vehicle

may

need service. When this

warning

light

is

on,

the

system will

not

limit wheel

spin.

Adjust

your

The

traction control system

wming

light

may

come

on

for

the

foIlowing reasons:

dr;ivi3g

accordingly.

If

yos

turn

the

system

off

by

pressing

the

button

located

on

the end

of

the

shift

lever,

the

warning

light

will come

on

and

stay

on.

To

turn

the system

back

on,

press the button

again.

The

warning

light

should

go

off.

(See “Traction Control System”

in

the

Index

for

more

kf~m;ation.)

TEMPERATURE

This

gage

neasrrres

the

temperature

of

your

engine.

If the

pointer

moves

into

the

red

area,

your

engine

is

~OO

hot.

A

tenperatwe indicator

chime

wirl

sound.

Bight

Wili

turn

on

2nd

a

If

you have

been

operating

your

vehicle

under

noma1

driving

conditions,

and

the

temperature

indicator

fight

turns

on,

you

should

pull

off

the

road,

stop

your

vehicle

and

turn

off

the

engine

as

soon

as

possible.

NOTICE:

If

you

keep

driving

your

vehicle with

this

light

on,

after

a

whiie, your emission controls

rnay

not

work

as

well, your

fuel

economy

may

not

be

as

good

and

your

engine

may

not

PUR

as

smoothly.

This

could

lead

to

costly

repairs

that

may

not

be

covered

by

pur

warranty.

This jight should corne on,

as

a

check

to

show

YOU

it is

working, when the ignition is

on

and

the engine is not

running.

If

the light

doesn’t

come

on,

have it repaired.

This

light

will

also

come

QII

during

;I

malfunction in one

of

~WO

ways:

8

Light

Flashing

--

A

misfire condition

has

been

detected.

A

misfire increases vehicle emissions

and

may damage

the

emission controi system

on

your

vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis

and

service rnay be required.

@

Eight

On

Steady

--

An

emission control system

malfunction

has

been detected on

your

vehicle.

Dealer

or

qualified service center diagnosis and

service

may

be required.

-.-

8:.

f.

,fie

~

2s

F‘fp&-!&g

--

The following

may

prevent more

serious

damage

to

your vehicle:

Reducing vehicle speed.

Avoiding hard accelerations.

e

Avoiding steep uphill

grades.

If

YOU

are towing a trailer, reduce the amount

of

cargo being hauled

as

soon

as

it

is possible.

If

the light stops flashing

and

remains

on

steady, see

“If

the

Light

Is

On Steady” following.

Sf

the light continues

to

flash, when it

is

safe

to

do

so,

stop

the

vehicle. Find

a

safe place to park your vehicle.

Turn

the key

off,

wait

at least

IO

seconds and restart the

engine.

If

the

light

remains on

steady,

see

“If

the

Light

Is

On Steady” following.

If

the light

is

still flashing,

follow the previous steps,

and

drive the vehcle

to

your

dealer or qualified service center €or service.

If

so,

your

electrical system

may

be wet. The condition

will

usually be cgrrected when

the

electrical system

dries

out.

A

few driving

trips

should

turn

the

light

off.

Maw

you

recently changed

brands

of

fuel?

If

so,

be

sure

to

he1

your

vehicie

with

quality

fuel

(see

"Fuel"

in

the

Index).

Poor

fuel quality

will

cause

your

engine

not

to

FJ~

as

efficiently

as

designed.

YQU

may

notice this as stalling after

start-up,

stalling when

you

pent

the vehicle into

gear,

misfiring,

hesitation

on

acceleration or

stumbling

on

acceleration. (These

conditions may

go

away

once

the

engine

is

warned

up.

j

This

will be detected

by

the

system

and

cause

the

light

to

turn

OR.

If

you experience one

or

more

of

these

conditions,

chmge the fuel

brand

you

use.

It

will

n-ecpire

at

least one

full

tank

of

the

proper fuel

to

tuna

the

light

off.

If

none

of

the

above steps

hove

lrirade

the

light

turn

off,

have

your

dealer or qualified

service

center check

the

vehicle.

Your

dealer has

the

proper

test

equipment

and

diagnostic tools

to

fix

any

nnechanicai

or

electnictrl

problems that

may

have

developed.

could

be

a

problem

with

your

engine

0i1

pressure.

'

SERVICE

VEHICLE

non-emission

problems.

SOON

These

problems

may

not

be

obvious

and

may

affect

vehicle performance

or

durability.

Consult

a

qualified

dealership for necessary repairs

to

maintain

top

vehicle

performance. The

light

will

come

QIP

briefly when

your

ignition

is

turned

on

to

S~OW

that

it

is

workmg

properly.

1

UNLEADED

FUEL

ONLY

I

&~(-&jJ?-%

_.

_-

&SD&$V

7-

0

7:

\@+@--JQ)

@

&-J~pp@.&)

y-

_Y

A

dk

A

a

see

things

you need

to

see

when

it's

dark

outsside.

Be

sure

to

keep

the

HUD

image

dim

and placed

EQW

in

YOUF

field

of

view.

If

your

vehicle

is

equipped with the Wead-Up Display

(HUD),

you

can

see

some

of

the

driver infomation that

appears

your

irrstrumerat

cluster.

The

infomation

may

be displayed

in

English

or

metric

units

and

appears as a reflection

ir,

the windshield. The

HLJD consists

of

the following information:

8

Speedometer Reading

0

Turn

Signal Indicators

8

High-Beam

Meadlamp Indicator

@

Check

Gages Message

The

Z-:UD

shows

these images when

they

are lighted

on

tke

instrument

pamS

cluster.

Be sure

to

continue

scanning

your

displays, controls and

driving environment

Just

as

you wouid

in

a

vehicle

without

XUD.

If

you

sever

hook

at

your

instrt.merit

panel,

you

may

got

see something

imgoI-aana,

such

as

a

warning

light.

The

brightness

of

the

E3U.D

image is determined by

whether the headlamps

are on

or

off,

and

where

you

have

the

HUD

dimer control

set.

2.

Adjust

the seat to

pur

driving

posielop~.

Slide

the

image height adjuster

control

dl

the

way

up,

raising

the

Enage

as

far

as

possible.

3.

Now slide the image height adjuster

COII~.~

down

SQ

the image

is

as

low

as

possible

but

still

in

full view.

4.

Slide the dimer control

d~wnwt~d

until the

HUD

image

is

no

brighter

than

necessary.

A

I'iw

is

Mowr~,

Sce

"'%;USC:S

and

Circuit Breakers"

in

the

Index.

Keep

in

mind

that

yorrr

wincishield

is

part

of

the

WUD

system.

If

you

ever

have

to

have

your windshield

replaced,

be

sure

to

get

one

that

is

designed

for

WUD

OF

your

HUD

image

may

look

bhrred

or

out

of

focus.

Ymr

vehicle

may

be equipped

with

a

Driver

Infolmntionz

Center

(DIC).

The

DIC

will

display

information about how

your

vehicle

is

functioning,

as

well

as

warning messages

if

a

system

pr~b'ee~~~

is

deteczed.

The

fobwing

buttons

are

on

the

DIC

control panel

which

is

located

to

the left

of

the steering

column:

0

ODO/TRfB:

Use

this button

to

display your total

and

trip

miles.

e

mL

INFO:

Press

this

button to display fuel

infomation such

as,

fuel

used, fuel

range

and

fuel economy.

Q

GAGE

INFO:

Use

this

button to

display

oil

pressure,

oil

Me,

coolant

temperature,

tire

pressure

and

battery

infomation.

RESET:

”his

button,

used dong with other buttons,

will

reset system functions.

@

ENGNET:

Use

this

button

to

change the display

between English and metric

units.

p@r@-jn&

Choice

gJ1c

DispEay

This

feature allows two different drivers to store and

recall their

QWP~

preferred display

mode.

The personal

choice settings displayed

on

the

DIC

are determined by

the transmitter used

t~

enter

the

vehicle. After

the

UNLOCK

button

of

a

remote keyless entry transmitter

is pressed

and

the ignition is

in

RUN,

the

DIC

will

display

the

identified driver. The settings can also be

changed

by

briefly pressing

one

of

the

MEMORY

buttons

located

on

the driver’s

door.

The

DIC

can also

be

used

to program the following

personal

choice

features available with

your

vehicle:

e

Memory

Seats

Memory Door Locks

Security Feedback

Delayed Locking

e

Perimeter Lighting

Parallel

Park

Assist Mirror

Window Lockout

See “Personal Choice Features”

in

the

Index

and

“DIC

Personal Choice Progran~ning’~

later

in

this

part.

The

DIC

is used to

program

infomation

€or

DWIVEiR

#1

and

DRIVER

#2.

The

DIC

will

identify

a

person

as

UNKNOWN

DRIVER

if

they

are

neither

DRIVER

#I

nor

DRIVER

#2.

it

~hcre

are

no

problems detected, the

display

will

return

[ti

he

mode

selected

by

that driver the last time the

ignition

was

turned

off.

1

f

2

problem

is

detected,

a

diagnostic message will

appear

in the

display.

The following pages will show

the

messages

you

may

see

on

the

DIC

display.

The

message

center

is

continuously updated with

the

vehicle's performance

status.

When

this

button

is

pressed,

the

display

will

show

the

total

mileage,

an;d

Trip

T

or

Trig

2

miles.

Trip

I

and

Trip

2

will

display

the miles traveled since

the

last

reset.

To

reset

the

trig

odometer, press the

ODOKMP

button

until

the

trig

miles are

shown

in

the

DIC

display,

then

press

the

RESET

button.

The

trip odometer

will

f~ow

accumulate

miles

until the next

reset.

Average

Fue%

ECCD~Q~Y:

Press

the

WEE

button

mtil

the display

shows

FUEL

ECONOMY

AVERAGE.

Average

fuel

economy

is

viewed

as

a

long

term

approximation

of

your

overall driving conditions.

To

learn

the average

fuel

econcrny

from

a new

starting

point,

press

the

RESET

button

while

the

average

fuel

economy

is

displayed

in

the

D6C.

F~S~UI&~IEQUS

Fuel ECQKIOH~~:

Press

the

FUEL

button

until

the display

shows

FUEL

ECONOMY

INST.

Instantaneous fuel economy

varies

with your driving

conditions, such as acceleration,

braking

and the grade

of

the

road

being

traveled. The

RESET

button

does

not

hnction

in

this mode.

Fuel

Range:

Press the

FUEL

button until the display

shows

FUEL

RANGE.

The fuel range will calculate

the

remaining distance you

can

chive without refueling.

This

calculation is based on the average fuel economy

for

the

last

25

miles

(40.25

km)

driven, and the fuel remaining

in the fuel

tank.

The

RESET

button does not function

in

this

mode.

Fuel

Used:

Press the

mTEk

button until the display

shows

IFCTIEL

USED.

This

display will show you how

much fuel has been used since the last reset.

TQ

learn

how much fuel is used from a new starting point, press

the RESET button while the fbel used is displayed

-h

the

DIC.

Oil

Pressure:

Press the

GAGES

button

until

OIL

PRESSURE

appears

in

the

display.

If

there are no

problems detected with the oil pressure, the display

will

show

OIL

PRESSURE

NORMAL.

If

a low oil pressure

condition is detected, the display

will

show

OIL

PRESSURE

LOW.

If

you see the

OIL

PRESSURE

LOW

message, you could be low on

oil

or

your

oil is

not going through the engine properly. See your dealer

for service.

Coolant

Temperature:

Press the

GAGES

button until

COOLANT

TEMB

appears in the display.

If

there are

no

problems detected

with

the temperature,

C~C&4NI’

TEMP

NORMAL

will

appear

in

the

display.

If

the

temperature is too

high,

COOLANT

TEMP

HOT

will

appear in the display.

If

you see the

COOLANT

TEMP

HOT message, your engine

is

overheated. You should

pull

off

the road,

stop

your vehicle

and

turn

off

your

engine as soon as possible.

This

manual

explains what

to

do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

Battery

Volts:

Press the

GAGES

button until the

display shows BATTERY STAm.

If

the voltage is

normal

the display

will

show BATTERY STATE

NORMAE.

If

the voltage

drops

below

10.5

volts, the

display will show

BATTERY

STAm

LOW.

If

the

voltage

is

above

16

volts, the display will show

BATTERY STATE

HIGH.

If

the display shows the high

or low message, you need

to

have your battery checked.

Oil

Life

Monitor

(Index):

Psess

the

GAGES

button

until

OIL

LIFE

INDEX

appears in the display. The

OIL

LEE

INDEX

NORMAL

display will show

an

estimate

of

the oil’s remaining useful Me. When the oil life index

is less

than

IO%,

the display

will

show

OIL

LIFE

INDEX

CHANGE

OIL.

When

you

have the oil changed

according

to

the maintenance schedule (see

“Maintenance Schedule” in the Index), you will have to

reset the oil We monitor.

To

do

this,

press and hold the

RESET’

button

for

more

than

five seconds while the oil

life index

is

being displayed

on

the

DPC.

The oil life will

change to

100%.

Tire

Psessure

Status:

Press

the

GAGES

button until

‘FWE

IPWSSUWE

appears in the display.

TWE

PRESSUWE

NORMAL

is displayed when the Check

Tire Pressure System believes your ve~cle’s tire

pressures

are

normal.

If

a potential tire pressure problem

is

detected,

the

display will show

gIRE

PRESSURE

LOW

CHECK

TIRES.

If

you see the

azRE

PRESSURE

LOW:

CHECK

TIRES

message, you

should

st~p

as

soon

as

you can and check all your

tires

for damage.

(If

a

tire

is

flat, see

‘‘If

a Tire Goes Flat” in

the Index.)

Also

check

the

tire

pressure in

all

four tires

as

soon

as

you

can.

See “Inflation

-

Tire Pressure” and

“Check Tire Pressure System” in the Index.

mere are

times

when you will

have

to

reset (calibrate)

the

Check

Tire

Pressure

System.

See

“Check

Tire

Pressure System” in

the

Index.

jJ&m&qgs

sj&

&ssag@j

Other messages or warnings may appear

in

the

DE

display such

as:

0

WINDSHIELD

WASHER

FLUID

LOW

ENG

COOLANT

LOW

-

CHECK

LEVEL

ENGINE

OIL

LOW

-

CHECK

LEVEL

0

CHANGE

ENGINE

OIL

SOON

0

TRACTION

CONTROL

SYSTEM

ACTIVE

0

DOOR

AJAR

0

TRUNKAJAR

Pressing

any

of

the DIC control buttons will remove the

above messages or warnings

from

the

DIC

display.

The

DIC

can

be

used

$0

program

the

following

personal

choice

features

available

with

your vehicle:

@

Melnosy

Seats

Memory

Door

Locks

Security Feedback

@

Delayed hcking

See

‘‘Personal

Choice Features”

In

the

Index.

T’ne

DTC

is

used

to

program the

personal

choices

of

two

drivers. The driver’s are recognized by

DRIVER

#I

and

DRIVER

#2.

You

will

kt

the

DIC

know

which driver

you

are

by

using

your

remote

keyless

entry

transmitter

or

by

pressing

the

appropriate memory seat control

buttorm

located

on

the driver’s door.

The

remote

transmitter

was

pre-programmed

to

belong

to

DRIVER

#

9

or

DRIVER

#2.

The

last

driver

number remembered

by

the

DIC

will

show

on

the

display

each time

the

UNLOCK

button

on

the

same

transmitter

is

pressed,

and

the

ignition

is

turned

OE.

When

you

press

UNLOCK

en

your

transmitter, the

DIC

will

automaticaihy change

driver

numbers

2nd

the

vehicle

will

recall

the

persod

choice

settings

that

were

last

made

to

correspond

to

your transmitter.

if

you unlock the vehicle

using

your

door

key

instead

sf

your

zransmitter,

the

DIC

will

not

change

drivers

2nd

will

recall the

infomation

from

the

last

transmitter use

or

the

last

driver change

using

the

men~ory

seat

controls.

If

this

happens

and

you

were

not

the

last

driver

of

the

vehicle, simply

press

your correct

driver

number

on

the

memory

seat controls

OH

press the

UNLOCK

button

on

your

transmitter.

See

the

following steps

for

personab.

choice

progrinmrning

instructions.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Turn

the

ignition

on

and

keep the

transaxle

in

PARK

(P).

hfom

the

DIC

which driver

you

are

by

pressing

the

UNLOCK

button

on

your

transmitter

or the

appropriate

memory

seat control.

Press

and

hold

the

ENGMET

button

for

five

seconds.

WELCOME TO

BUICK

OPTION

FEATURE

will appear

in

the

display.

T&

will

be your driver

number.

You

are

now

in

the

sclection

mode

and

the

DIC

is

ready

to

program

your

personal

choices

in

memory.

Use

the

ENG/MET

button

PO

sehect

options.

Use

the

RESET

button

to

save

the selection

and

advance

to

the

Each feature that can

be

personalized

will

appear

in

the

display. Once

you

have made

;1

selection

for

a

feature,

alae

DEC

will

MOW

on

to

the

choice feature.

If

YOU

would

like

to

exit

the

seiection

mode

without

moving through each

of

the personal choice features,

simply press

a

different button

on

the

DIC

or

turn

off

the

ignition. Whatever

personal

choices

you

made

will

still

be

retained, even without passing

through

each

of

the features.

If

you happen

to

move past

a

seiectiora

YOU

would

like

to

make

a

personal

choice

for,

press

UNLOCK

on

your

transmitter

c)r

press

the

appropriate driver r,umber

on

the

seat control.

This

will

return

you

to

the beginning

of

the

option

feature programing mode.

The

parakl

park

assist

mirror,

which tips

the

passenger

mirror

while

the

vehick

is

in

REVERSE

(W),

can be

made

active

or

inactive through the

DIC.

%berm

PARALLEL

PARK-OFF-ON

appears on the display,

use

the

ENGMET

button

t~

toggle

the

arrow

between

OW

and

ON.

When

you

have made

your

choice,

press

the

RESET

button to record

your

selection.

For

more

idormation

on

this

feature, see

“Mirrors”

in

the

Index.

If

you

choose

ON

for

LOCK

FEEDBACK

YOU

will

also

wed

to

choose

LIGHTS

or

LIGHTS

+

HORN.

You

can select

the

following

modes:

@

If

you

choose

OW

for

LOCK

FEEDBACK

and

OW

for

UNLOCK

FEEDBACK,

you

will

receive

no

security feedback when locking

or

unlocking

your vehicle.

@

Hf

ptl

choose

OFF

for

LOCK

FEEDBACK

and

LIGHTS

for

UNLOCK

FEEDBACK,

you

will

receive no security feedback when locking your

vehicle

and

the exterior

lamps

will

flash

when

unlocking your vehicle.

8

If

YOU

choose

EIGHTS

for

LOCK

FEEDBACK

and

OFF

for

UNLOCK

FEEDBACK,

your

exterior

lamps

wiEl

flash

when

Iochg

your vehicle

and

you

will receive

no

security feedback when unlocking

your

vehicle.

Hf

you

choose

LIGHTS

for

LOCK

FEEDBACK

and

LIGHTS

for

UNLOCK

FEEDBACK,

your exterior

lamps

will

flash

when locking

and

when

ur,Bocking

your vehicle.

If

you

choose

LIGHTS

+

HOW

for

LOCK

FEEDBACK

and

OFF

for

UNLCCK FEEDBACK,

your exterior

lamps

will

flash

and the

horn

will

chiq

when locking

your

vehicle

and

you will receive

no

security feedback when unlocking your vehicle.

Hf

you

choose

LIGHTS

+

HORN

for

LOCK

FEEDBACK

and

LIGHTS

for

UNLOCK

FEEDBACK,

your exterior

lamps

will

flash and the

horn

will

chirp when locking

YQW

vehicle

and

your

exterior

lamps

will

flash

when

unlocking

your

vehicle.

For

more

infomation

on

this

feature,

see

''Security

Feedback"

in

the Index.

pep&Q_@ier-

L&.$%gqg

When

the

UNLOCK

button on

the

transmitter is

pressed, the

DRL

lamps

(high-beams

at

reduced

intensity), parking

lmps

and back-up

laps

will

turn on

if

it

is

dark

enough according to the twilight sentinel.

You

can control activation

of

this

feature by choosing

OFF

QI-

ON

when the

PERIMETER

LIGHTS

choice is

displayed

on

the

DIC.

Make

your

choice

by

pressing

the

ENG/M.ET

button

and

record your choice by pressing

the

RESET

button.

NOTE:

If

you

want to choose

PERIMETER

LIGHTS

ON,

you

must

also

choose

LIGMTS

for

UNLOCK

FEEDBACK

while

making

the security

feedback choices.

For

more information

on

this

feature, see “Perimeter

Lighting”

in

the Index.

%fetnory

Position:

Choose

ON

when

the

SEAT

RECALL

choice appears,

and

then

choose

MEMORY

when the

RECALL

POSITION

choice appears.

0

Exit

Position: Choose

ON

when the

SEAT

RECALL

choice appears,

and

then choose

EXIT

when the

RECALL

POSITION

choice aslpears and your seat

will

move

all

the way down anh back

for

easy exit.

’he seat will also move when

you

enter the vehicle

after unlocking it with a remote keyless entry

transmitter. This

will

allow

for

easy entry

as

well.

fbr

more

information

on

this feature, see “Memory

Scats”

in

the Index.

The number

of

passenger windows locked

out

by

the

WINDOW

LQCK

switch can

be

programmed through

the

DIC.

If

you

choose

ALL

PASS,

all

three passenger

window

switches

will

be inactive when the WINDOW

LOCK

switch

is

enabled.

If

you choose

MAR,

only the two rear passenger

window switches will

be

locked

out

when the

WINDOW

LOCK

switch

is

enabled.

To

change modes:

1.

Move the

~QW

OR

the display betweer,

ALL PASS

and

REAR

by pressing the

ENGMET

button.

2.

Once

you

have made your selection, press the

RESET

button.

Your

choice will be retained

in

memory.

For

more information

on

this feature, see “Window

Lock”

in

the Index.

In

this section,

you'll

find

out

how

to

operate

the

comfort

control

and

audio

systems

cffered

with

your

whicle.

Be

sure

to

read

about

the

particular systems supplied

with

your vehicle.

3-2

3-5

3

-6

3-7

3-8

3-9

3

-9

3-

BO

3-10

C~mf~r;t

Cr>n:rols

5

3-14

Personal

Choice

Comfort

ControIs

(If

Equipped)

3-18

Dud

Automatic

CornforTernp Clirnate

Control

!

Air

Conditioning

3-21

Heating

$

VentiEation System

Passenger Compartment

Ais

Filter

[

3-27

Defogging

and

Defr'rosting

;

3-30

Wear Window Defogger

:

3-30

Passenger Climate

Control

:

3-33

Steering Wheel Controls

fcr

Climate

Controi

3-34

(If

Equipped)

:.

3-34

Setting

the

Cbck

i

3-35

AM-FM

Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

9

3-36

(.If

Equipped)

3-36

::

'Ms

section

tells

you

how

to

operate your

comfort

ctrrtt.ro8s.

Your

comfort

control

system uses

trxone-friendIy

hi-

B

348

refrigerant.

With

these systems, you can control the heating, cooling

and

ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle

also

has

a

flow-through ventilation system described

Eater

in

this

section.

This

feature

allows

two

different drivers

to

store

and

recall their

own

climate control settings

for

temperature,

air

delivery node, fan

and

passenger climate

COXI~FO~

fdom

status.

The

Personal

Choice

settings recalled

are

determined

by

the

transmitter

used

to

enter

the

vehicle.

After the

UNLOCK

button of

a

remote keyless entry

transmitter

is

pressed,

and

the

igrrition

is

in

RUN,

the

climate

control

will

adjust

to

the

last

settings

of

the

identified driver.

The

settings can

also

be

changed

by

briefly pressing one

of

the

MEMORY

seat switches

located on the

driver's

door

panel.

When

adjustments

are

made,

the

new

settings

are

automatically

saved

for

the

driver.

Your

vehicle

has

the

dual

automatic cornfortemp climate

control system. The fdowing

infomation

tells

you

how

1:

works.

Yorr

will

hear a beep each time a

button

is

pushed

and

a

small

light

orr

the

button

will

indicate

which

buttons

lire

active.

The

lights are

QIP

ali

buttons except

EMP,

FAN

and

AIR

FLOW. The

display

will

show

fm

speed,

comfort level setting

and

airf'~

direction

for

a

few

seconds whenever any button,

except

for

the

rear

defog,

is

pushed, and

then

it

will

display the outside

temperature. The outside temperature reading

is

most

accurate when the vehicle

is

movi~g.

During

stops,

when drivkg

slow,

QF

when

the

engine

is

first

sta-ted after

a

short

trip,

the

outside temperature

reading

can

be

affected by

road

or

engine

heat.

In

order

to

enswe

proper automatic climate control operation, the

outside temperature

display

may

not

update

BS

quickly

as

expected.

in

cold

weather,

the

system will delay turning

t5

re

f

anon

high,

to

avoid blowing

cold

air.

The Iength

of

the delay

depends on the engine coolant temperature and the

outside temperature.

Pushing

the

FAN,

AIR

FLOW

or

FRONT

buttons will override

this

delay,

turn

off

the

AUTO

setting and change the fan speed.

You

may

also

manually

adjust the

air

delivery

or

fan speed.

AIR

FLOW

This

button

is

used to change the direction

of

the airflow.

The

airflow choices available are

WINDSHIELD-FIBOR.

If

the

systen

is

set

for

AUTO,

pressing the

AIR

FLOW

button

will

display the current

airflow direction, the comfort setting and the fan

speed.

Press

the

AIR

FLOW

up

or

down

button again

to

change the direction

of

the

airflow.

FLOOR,

FLOOR-MID,

MID

and

OFF:

If

the passenger comfort

CQII~~O~

is

tuned

on,

It

can be turned

off

by

pressing the

OW

button

once.

Pressing the

OFF

button

a

second time

wiil

turn

off

the

main system. Turning

off

the

main

system causes

the

fan

to

turn

off

and

the airflow

to

be directed to the

FLOOR.

The system will

still

try

to

keep the interior

of

the

vehicle at

the

previous chosen

comfsrt

settifig. The

outside temperature

will

show

on

the

display

when

the

system

is

off.

The ventilation

system

always

allows

fresh

air

t~

flow

through

your

vehicle

when

the vehicle

is

moving even

with

the

system

in

the

OFF

mode.

VENT:

The

VENT

button

aEIows

outside

air

to

flow

through

your

vehicle without the

air

conditioning

compressor

working.

Selecting

VENT

and

the

AUTO

button at

the

same time allows the system

to

contsoi

automatically without

the

use

of

the

ais:

conditioning

compressor

or

the use

of

the MCIRC mode.

To

turn

off

the

VENT

selection, push the

VENT

button again.

C:

When

RECIRC

is

selected, the

system

will

limit

the

mount

of

outside

air

entering your vehicle.

This

is

helpful when you are trying

to

cool the interior

of

the vehicle quickly or

limit

the mount

of

outside

air

entering

your

vehicle

for

some other reason.

IIPlECmC

and

AUTO

may

be

selected

at

the same

time.

The

system

will

remain

in

RECRC

until

the

ignition

is

tuned

off.

me system

will

return back

to

the previousBy

selected mode when the car

is

wed back

on.

MCRC

can

be

selected in

dl

manual

airflow modes except

FRONT

defrost.

RECRC

cannot

be selected

with

the

VENT

button.

9

FRON*

ms

selec~on

i~

used

to

dehst

he

windshield

by

directing

the

~OW

tow& the widshield.

If

FRONT

is

selected while in the

AUTO

mode, the

fan

speed

md

the

air

temperature

from

the

fi~nt

defroster

will

vary.

If

a

mmud

fan

speed setting is selected, the

fan

speed

will

remain

at that selection

until

another

fan

speed selection

is

made

or

the

AUTO

mode

is

selected.

To

turn

off

FRONT',

press

the AUTO

or

AW

mow

bUttQn.

FRONT

defrost

will

work

better

if

any

ice

QP

snow

is

cleared

from

the

hood

ad

the

air

inlet

area

between the

base

of

the windshield

and

the hood.

...A,...

..

.

. . .

.

TkntiIatioEs

\rips

@

Keep the

hood

md

front air inlet free

of

ice, snow or

any other

Q~S~IXC~~QII

such

as

leaves. The heater

md

defroster

will

work better, reducing

the

chance

of

hgging

YQW

windows.

Keep the

air

path

under

the front seats clear

of

objects.

ms

helps

air

to

ckcukite

throughout

your

vehicle.

Passenger

compammezt.

fir

~g&%

Passenger compartment

air,

both outside

air

md

recirculated

air,

is routed

through

a

passenger

compartment filter, which is

part

of

a three piece filter

system.

The

filter removes certain particles from the air,

including pollen

andl

dust

particles. Reductions

in

OW,

which may

QCCW

more quickly

in

dusty

areas,

indicate

that

the filter needs to be replaced early.

The

lines

you

see

on

the

rex

window

wm

the

glass.

Press

this

button

to

start

warming

your

Window.

The ffront seat passenger

can

control the

air

temperature

in

their seating area.

This

can be set

up

to

5

OF

(-

15

O

C>

cooler or warmer than the

primary

setting. You

can

activate

this

featwe

by

sliding

the

lever

located

QIP

the

instrument panel toward

warm

or

cool.

If

the passenger control has been

turned

on, it can be

turned

off

by pressing the

OFF

button once. Pressing the

OFF

button

a second time

will

turn

off

the main system.

"

Your

DeBco Electronics audio system has been designed

to

operate easily

and

give

years

of

listeing pleasmi.

You

will

get

the

most

enjoyment

out

of

it

if

you acquaint

yourself with it

first.

Find

out

what

your Delco

Electronics system can

do

and

how

to

operate

all

its

.

controls,

to

be

sure

you're

getting

the

most

out

of

the?..

J

advanced

engineering that went into

it.

.

Setting

&he

Chock

Press

and

hold

until

the correct

how

appears. Press

and

hold

MIN

until

the correct minute appears.

You

may set the

clock

with

the

ignition

off

if

YOU

press

RECALL

fist

and

follow

the

same

procedure

described above.

VOLUME:

This

hob

turns

the system

on

and

off

anad

controls

the

volume.

To

increase volume

and

turn

the

radio

on,

turn

the

knob to the

right.

Turn

it

to

the

left

to

decrease volume.

5;.

Repeat

:he

steps

for

each

pushb~tt~n.

P SCAN:

Press

this

button

to

:isten

to

each

of

your

preset

stations

f~r

a

few

seconds.

The

radio

will

go

to

the

first

preset

station,

stcp

for

a

few

seconds,

then

go

on

Fa

the

station.

Press

P

SCAN

again

to

stop

scanning.

The

radio

will

not

stop

at

a

preset

if

the

station

is

weak.

BASS:

Press this

knob

lightly

so

it

extends.

Tun

the

knob to increase

or

decrease bass.

TREB:

Press this

knob

lightly

so

it extends. Turn

the

knob to increase

or

decrease treble.

If

a station

is

weak

or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

Push

these

hobs

back into their stored positions when

you're

not

using them.

BAL:

Turn

the control behind the upper

knob

to move

the

somi

to the left

or

right

speakers. The middle

position balances the sound between

the

speakers.

FADE:

Turn

the

control behind the lower

knob

to move

the

sound

to

thc

front

or

rear speakers. The middle

position

balmces

the

sound

between the speakers.

7-.

.

L..

(..,I

&F$i

7:.

The longer side with

the

tape

visible

should face

to

the

right.

If

the

ignition and the radio are

on,

the

tape can be

inserted

and

will begin playing.

If

you hear nothing or

hear

a

garbled

sound,

the tape may not be in squarely.

Press

EJECT

to remove the tape

and

start over.

&Lag

2

*."

::,4~y&~~$~

-

''-.:.:%.A

V'

L+&

Mile

the

tape

is

playing,

use

the

VOLUME,

FADE,

BAL,

BASS

and

TBZEB

controls

just

as

you

do

for

the

radio.

Other controk may have different functions when

a tape

is

inserted. The display will

show

an

mow to

show

which side

of

the tape is playing.

If

you want to insert a tape when

the

ignition or radio

is

off,

first press

EJECT

or

RECALL.

Note that the

cassette tape adapter

kits

for

portable compact disc

players will work in your cassette tape player.

Your tape bias is set automatical2y.

If

E

and

a

number appear

on

the radio display, the tape

won't play because

of

an

error.

e

EdO:

The tape

is

tight and the player

can't

turn the

tape

hubs.

Remove the tape.

Hold

the tape with the

open end down

and

try

to

turn

the right

hub

to

the

left with

a

pencil.

Turn

the tape

over

and repeat.

If

the

hubs

do

not

turn

easily, your tape may be

damaged

and

shoutct

not

be

used

in

the player.

Try

a new tape

to

make

sure your player

is

working properly.

Ell:

The tape is broken. Try

a

new

tape.

’If

any

enor

occurs repeatedly

OF-

if

an

~KQF

can’t

be

corrected,

please

contact

your

dealer.

If

yocs

radh

disphys

zn

error

number,

write

it

dow3

and

provide

it

to

pur

dealer

when

reporting the problem.

PWV

(I):

Press

tkis

brrtton

to

search

the

~IXV~QUS

selection

on

the tape.

Your

tape

;must

have

at

least

three

seconds

of

silence

between

each

selection

for

work.

The

sound

will

Pllute while

seeking.

button

to

search

for

the

on

the

tape.

Your

tape

must

have

at

Ieast

three

seconds

sf

silence between

each

selection

for

work.

The

sound

will

mute

while

seekrrg.

44

(3):

Press

this

button

to reverse

the

tape

rapidly.

Press

It

again

to

return

to

playing speed.

The

radio

will

play

while

the

tape

reverses.

,,

(4):

Press

this

button

to

advmce

quickly

IS

another

pap;

of

the

tape. Press the

buttcm

again

to

return

to

playing

speed.

The

radio

will

play

whiie

the

tape

advances.

EJECT:

Press

this

button

to

remove

rile

tape.

The

radio

will

play.

__

.

. .

...

.,.

.

RECALL:

Press

this

button

briefly

to

recall

the

station

being played or

to

display

the

clock.

To

change

whzt

is

normally

shown

on

the

display

(station

OH

time), press

this

button

until

you

see the display

you

want,

then

hold

the

button

until

the

display

flashes.

If

you

press

the

button when

the

ignition

is

oE,

the

clock

will

show

for

a

few

seconds.

y:...,

-2

p&Ij%p

-0

2

Sf-&.on

AM-FM:

Press

this

bl~tt~n

to

switch between

AlM,

FMl

and

FM2.

The

display

shows

your

selection.

'TUNE:

Press

the

up

or

down mow

to

choose

radio

stations.

SEEK:

Press

Lie

up

or

down

mcw

to

go

to

the

ar

lower station

and

stay there.

The

sound

will

mute

while seeking.

s

SCAN:

Tress

one

of

the

SEEK

arrows for

two

seconds

and

SCAN

will

appear

011.

the display.

Use

SCAN

to

listen

to

stations

for

a

few

seconds.

The

radio

will

go

to

a

station,

stop

€or

a

few seconds,

then

go

on

to the next

station,

Press one

of

the SEEK

buttons

again

to

st~p

scanning,

The

sound

will

mute

while

scanning.

.E

yeu

want

to

insert

a

tape

wher?,

the

igrrition

or

radio

is

of?,

first

press

EJECT

or

RECALL.

Note

that

the

cassette tape adapter

kits

for

pomhle compact

disc

players

will

\work

in

your

cassette

tape player.

Your

tape

bias

is

set

mtornatica18y.

If‘

E

and

a

number

appear

~s,

the

radio

display,

the

tape

won’t

play because

sf

an

~ITQ~.

e?

If

any

error

occurs

repeatedly

or

if

an

enor

can’t

be

corrected,

please

csntsct

your

dealer.

If

your

rzdio

displays

an

error

number,

write

it

down

and

provide

it

to

your

dealer when reporting

the

problem.

Press

this

button to search

for

the previous

selection

on

the

tape. Your tape

must

have

at

least three

seconds

of

silence between

each

selection

for

work.

The

SQU~C!.

wili

mute

while

seeking.

Press

this

button

to

search

for

the next

selection

on

the

tape.

Your

tape must

have

at

least

three

seconds

of

silence

between each selection

for

work.

The

sound

will

mute

while

seeking.

The

SEEK

up

and

down

mows

will

also

find

the

previous and

on

the tape.

44

(3):

Press

this

button to reverse

the

tape

rapidly.

Press

it

again

KI

return

to

playing

speed.

The

rzdbo

will

play while the tape reverses.

bb

(4):

Press

this

5~itcn

to

advance

quickly

tc

another

part

off

the

tape.

Press

the button again

to

return

to

playing

speed. The

radio

will

play

while

the

tape

advances.

SIDE

(5):

Press

this

button

to

change

the

side

of

the

tape that

is

playing.

The

double-D

symbol

wiEI

appear

on

the

display.

(6):

Press

this

button

to

reduce background noise.

6.

Press

this

button

to

go

to

the

HE

you

hold

the

button

or

press

it

more

than once, the

pkyer

will

c~ntinane

ITIGV~II~

forward

through

the

disc.

The

sourpd

wiiB

mute

whiie

seeking.

The

SEEK

down

and

up

im-ows

will

also

find

the

next selections on

the

disc.

44

(3):

Press

and

hold

this

button

to

quickly reverse

within

a

track.

You

will

ilea

sound.

playing.

Press

it again within five seconds to see

how

long

it

has

been playing.

TQ

change what is normally

shown

on

the

display (track or elapsed

time),

press the

button

until

YOU

see the

display

YOU

want,

then

hold

the

button

until

the

display Washes.

AM-FM:

Press

this

button

to

play the

radio

when

a

disc

is

in the player.

SOURCE:

Press

this

button

to

change to the

disc

fbnction

when

he

radio

is

on.

When a disc is inserted,

the

disc

will

play

until

YOU

press

AA4-m.

Then

the

disc

will

stop playing

and

the

radio will

play.

Press

SOURCE

again

to

play

a

disc

again.

CD

PLAY

will

show

on

EJECE

Press

this

button

to

~~XIIQV~

the disc. The

EXI~O

will.

play.

the

display.

I%

you

turn

off

the

ignition or

radio

with

a

disc in

the

player,

it

will

stay

in

the

player.

men

YOU

turn

on

the

ignition

OF

system,

the

disc

will

start

playing

where

it

stopped, if it

was

the

last-selected

audio

source.

P!aying

til8

Radio

VOLUME:

Press

this

hob

to

turn

the

system

on

md

OB.

To

increase volume, turn

the

knob

to

the

right.

Turn

it

to

the left

to

decrease

VO~UIIE.

3-21

RECALL:

Press

this

button

briefly

to

recal!

the

statim

being played

or

to

display

the

clock.

To

change

what

Is

EomalEy

shown

on

the

display

(station

or

time), press

the

RECALL

butttorn

until

yon

see

the

display

YSU

want.

then

hold

the

RECALL

button

until

the display flashes.

If

you

press the

button

when

the ignition

is

off,

the ck~k

wiEI

show

for

8

Eew

seconds.

AM-FM:

Press

this

button

to

switch

between

AM,

FME.

and

FM2.

The

display

shows

your

selection.

TUNE:

Press

the

up

OF

down

mow

to

choose

sadi~

stations.

SEEK:

Press the

up

or

down

arrow to

go

to

the

lower

station

and

stay

there.

The

sound

will

mute

while

seeking.

SCAN:

Press

one

sf

the

SEEK

mows

for

EWO

seconds

and

SCAN

wiPB

appear

on

the

display.

Use

SCAN

to

listen

to

stations

for

a

few

seconds. The radio

wiIB

go to

2

stzti~n,

stop

for

a

few seconds,

the^

go

on

to

the next

station.

Press

one

of

the

SEEK

mows

again

to

stop

scanning.

Tie

sound

will

mute while scanning.

f

.

Turn

the

radio

on.

2.

Press

AIM-FM

to

select the band.

4.

Press

TONI2

tc

select

the

set*iing

YSU

prefer.

5.

Press

an@

hodd

me

of

the

six

numbered

buttons.

The

sound

will

mute. When it returns, release

the

button.

Whenever

you

press

that

cumbered

button,

the

station

you

set

will

return

and

the tone

you

selected

will

be automatically selected

for

that

button.

6.

Repeat

the

steps

Ex

e3ch pushb~tton.

P

SCAN:

Press

this

button

BQ

Bisten

to

each

of

your

preset stations for

a

fcw seconds.

The

radio

will

go

to

the first preset

station,

stop

for

a

€ew

seconds, then

go

on

to

the

statim.

Press

P

SCAN

again

to

stop

scanning.

If

a

preset

station

has

we&

reception,

the

radio

will

not

stop

at

the

preset station.

3-22

....._.

-

BASS:

Press

Clis knob

lightly

so

it

extends.

Turn

the

knob

to

increase

or

decrease

bass.

TREB:

Press

this

knob

iightly

so

it

extends.

Turn

the

knob

to increase

GT

decrease

treble.

If

a

sf~tiarn

is

we&

or

noisy,

you

may

want

to

decrease

the

treble.

Push

these knobs back

into

their

stored

positions

when

YcLl’re

H1Qt

Using

eheEi.

TONE:

This

feature

allows

you

to

choose

preset

bass

and

treble

equalization

settings designed

for

ciassical,

pop,

rock,

jazz,

talk

and

ccuntrylwestem

stations.

CLASS

will

appear

on

the

display

when

you

firsst

press

TONE.

Each

time

you

press it,

mother

setting

vdl

appear

on

the clispiay.

Press

it

agsn

after

C

22

W

appears

a~td

MANUAL

will

appear.

Tone

corntrol

wiil

return

to

the

BASS

and

TREE3

knobs.

Also,

if

YSU

use

the

BASS

and

TWB

knobs,

control

will

retwn

to

them

and

MANUAL

will

appear.

P~sh

these

knobs

back

into

their

stored

positions

wher,

you’re

not

using

them.

If

YQU

want

to

insert

a

tape when the

ignition

or

radio

is

off,

first

press

EJECT

or

RECALL.

dour

tape bias is set automaticaliy.

If

E

and a

number

appear on the radio display, the tape

won’t play because

of

an

error.

0

El&

The tape

is

tight and the player can’t

turn

the

tape

hubs.

Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the

open end

down

and try

to

turn

the right hub to the

left with a pencil.

Turn

the tape over

and

repeat.

If

the

hubs

do

not turn easily, your tape may

be

damaged

and

should not

be

used in the player.

Try

2

new tape

to

make sure

your

player

is

working

properly.

@

Ell:

The

tape

is

broken.

Try

a

new tape.

Hf

my

emor

occurs

rcpestedly

or

if

;UI

enor can’t be

corrected,

picase

contact

your

dealer.

If

your

radio

displays

211

error

trunmber,

write

it

down

md

provide it to

your

dealer

when

reporting

the

problem.

PWEV

(1):

Press

this button

to

search for the previous

selection on the

tape.

Your

tape must have at least three

seconds

of

silence between each selection for

work. The

sound

will mute while seeking.

Press this

button

to

search for the next

selection on

the

tape.

Your

tape must have at least

three

seconds

of

silence between each selection

for

work.

The

sound

will mute while seeking.

Tine

SEEM

down

md

up

mows

will

also

find

the

ow

the tape.

44

(3):

Press

this

button

to

reverse the tape rapidly.

Press

it

again

to

return to playing speed.

The

radio

will

play

while the tape reverses.

..

(4):

Press this button to advance quickly

to

another

part

of

the tape. Press the button again to

return

to

playing speed. The radio will play while

the

tape advacces.

SIDE

(5):

Press this

button

to

change the side

of

the

tape that is playing.

RAND

(6):

Press

this

button

to

reduce background

noise. The double-D

symbol

will appear in the display.

Dolby Noise Reduction

is

mankafactrrred under

a

license

from

Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby

and

the

double-l) symbol

are

trademarks

of

Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

SOURCE:

Press this button

to

change to the tape or

disc function when the

radio

is

on.

If

both

a

tape and

a

disc

ape

installed, the system will first

go

to

tape play;

TAPE

SIDE

and an

arrow

will appear on

the

display.

If

SOURCE

is pressed again, the system will

go

to disc

play;

CD

PLAY

will appear on

the

display.

EJEC’E

The system

has

two

EJECT

buttons.

Press

the

button near the

CD

slot t~ remove a disc. Press the

button near the tape slot to remove a tape and the radio

will play.

If

you’re

driving

on

a

very

rough road

or

if

it’s very

hot,

the

disc may

not

play

and

an

~EQP

code may appear

on

the

display. When things get back

to

no~lmal, tbe disc

should play.

If

the

disc

comes

out,

it could

be

hat:

CLN:

E

this

message appears

on

the

display,

the

@

E20:

“he disc is

upside

down.

cassette tape player needs to be cleaned.

It

will still play

e

E20:

It

is

&dy,

or

wet.

tapes, but you should clean it

as

SQO~

as possible to

prevent damage to the tapes and player. See

“Care

of

@

E2&

TFhePe’S

$00

KlIUCh

IIIQiStWe

ill

he

8k.

(wait

Your Cassette Tape Player”

in

the Endex. After you clean

about

an

hour

and

try

again.)

the player, press and

hold

EJECT

for

five seconds

to

If

any

enor

QCCU~S

repeatedly

or

if

an

error

can’t be

reset the

CLN

indicator. The radio

will

display

---

to corrected, please contact your

dealer.

If

your

radio

show the indicator was reset. displays

an

error number, write

it

down

md

provide

it

to

YQW

cassette tape player automatically reduces your dealer when reporting

the

problem.

background noise from tapes encoded

with

Dolby

NIX.

(1):

PSeSS

this

button

t0

g0

to

the

Still%

of

the

YOU

may

turn

Dolby

off

by pressing the number

current

track,

if

more

than

eight

seconds have played.

E

six preset.

YOU

hold

the

button

or

press

it

more than once,

the

player will continue moving

back

through the disc.

The

sound

will

mute

while seeking.

Insert a disc partway into the slot, label

side

up.

The

player

will

pull it

in.

The

disc

should

begin

playing.

I

you

hold

the

button or

press

it

more

than

once,

the

If

you want

to

insert

a

CD

while the

igition

or the radio

player

will c~nthue moving

hwad

through

the

disc.

is

off,

first press

EJECT

or

=CALL.

The sound will mute while

seeking.

Playbg

a

c@mpact

Disc

Press

this

button

to

go

to

the

If

The

SEEK

down

md

up

mows

will

also

find

the

44

(3):

Press

and

hold

this

b~tt~n

to

quickly

reverse

within

a

track.

You

will

hex

sound.

3-26

W~th

the

optional compact disc changer, you can

play

up

to

12

discs

CQII~~~UQUS~~.

Nomd

size discs may be

played

using

the

trays

supplied

in

the magazine.

The

small

discs

(8

cm)

can be played

only

with

specially

designed

trays.

You must first

load

the magazine with discs before you

can

play a compact disc. Each

of

the

12

trays

holds one

disc.

Press

the

buttton

on

the

back

of

the

magazine

and

pull

gently

ora

one

of

the

trays.

Load

the

trays

from

bottom

to

top,

placing

a

disc

on

the

tray

label

side

down.

Once

you

have loaded

the

discs

in

tbe

magazine, slide

open the

door

of

the compact disc

(CD)

changer.

Wash

the

magazine

into

the

changer

in

the

direction

of

the

mow

marked

on

t~p

of

the magazine.

To

eject the magazine

from

the

player,

slide

;he

CD

changer

door

all

the way

open.

The magazine

will

automaticalfry

eject. Remember

to

keep

the

door

closed

whenever

possible

to keep dirt

and

dust

from getting

inside the changer.

A11

of

the

CD

functions

a-e cantrolled by

the

radio

buttons

except

fc~r

ejecting the magazine. Whenever a

CD

magazine

with

discs

is

Ioaded

in

the

changer, the

compact disc

S~III~Q~

will

appea

on

the

radio display.

If

the

CD

changer

is

checking

the

magazine for

CDs,

the

compact disc

symbol

will

flash

on the display

until

the

changer is ready

to

gray. when

a

CD

begins playing,

the

disc

and

track

number will be displayed.

The

disc

numbers

%e

listed

03

the

front

of

the

magazine.

If

E

and

a

number

appear

on

the

display,

an

error

has

occm-ed

and

the

compact

disc temporarily cannot

play.

Tie

CD

changer will send

an

error message

to

the

receiver

to

indicate:

E30:

Disc

Loaded Incorrectly (Label Side

Up)

If

the

error

occurred while trying

to

play

a

CD

in the

compact

disc

player

or

changer,

the

following conditions

may

have

caused the

-Tor:

The

road

is

too

rough.

The disc should play when

the

road

is

smoother.

The disc

is

dirty, scratched, wet

or

upside

down.

8

me

air

is

very

humid.

If

so,

w& about an hour

and

try

again.

@

The

CD

changer door is open. Completely close the

@

An

empty magazine is inserted

in

the

CD

changer.

door to restore noma1 operation.

Try

the magazine again with

a

disc loaded

on

one

of

the trays.

If

any error occurs repeatedly or

if

an error cannot be

corrected, please contact your dealer.

If

your radio

displays

an

emor number other than the error codes

listed previously, write it down

and

provide

it

to

your

dedes when reporting the problem.

Press

this

button

to go

to

the

start

of

the

current track, if more than eight seconds have played.

If

you

hold

the button

or

press

it more than once, the

player will continue moving back through the disc

to

the

The

sound

will mute whiIe seeking.

Press

this

button

to

go

to

the next track on the

disc.

E

you

hold

the button or press it more

than

once, the

player

will

continue moving

forwad

through

he

disc

to

the next track. The sound

wili

mute

while

seeking.

44

(3):

Press

and

hold

this

button

to

quickly reverse

within

a

track.

You

will

hear

sound.

bb

(4):

Press

and

hold

this

button

to

quick!y advance

within

a

track.

You

will

hear

SQU~.

SIDE

(5):

Press

this

button

to

select the next disc

in

the

magazine.

Each

time

you press

SIDE,

the

disc

number

on

the radio display

will

go

to

the next available

CD.

If

a

CD

cannot be played,

its

number

will

be

skipped

when

selecting discs while

using

the

SIDE

button.

RAND

(6):

Press

this

button to enter

the

random

play

rnode.RAND will

appear

an

the display. While

in

this

mode, tracks

and

discs will

&e

played

in

random

order.

Press the

button

again

to

turn

off

the random feature

and

return

to

noma1

operation.

RECALL:

Press this

button

to see

what

track

is

currently

playing.

Press

RECALL

again within five

seconds to see how long the track

has

been playing.

EL

TM

will

appear on the display

when

in

elapsed time

mode.

When

a

new track

starts

to

play, the track number

will also appear. Press

RECALL

a

third time and the

time

of

day

will

be

displayed.

SOURCE:

Press this button

to

play

a

CD

if

YQU

have

a

magazine loaded

in the

changer

and

the

radio

is

playing.

To

return to the radio

while

a

CD

is playing, press

AM-FM.

You

can

also

press this button

to

switch

between a cassette tape,

CD

or the

CD

changer

if

a11

three

are

loaded.

With

this

feature, your vehicle wGl recall

the

latest

radio

settings

as

adjusted the

last

time

your

vehicle

was

operated. This feature

allows

two different

drivers

to

store

and

recall their

QW~

radio

settings

for

AM

2nd

FM

presets,

last

tuned

station,

volume,

tone

and

audio

source

(radio,

cassette

or

CD).

The

settings recaiied

by

the

radio

are determined

by

which

transmitter

(i'I''

or

"2")

was used

to

enter the vehicle.

The

number

on

the

back

of

the

transmitter corresponds

to

driver

I.

or

to

driver

2.

After

the

UNLOCK

button

is

pressed

orr

the

transmitter and

the

ignition

is

in

RUN.

the

radio

settings

will

azmtsmaticalEy

adjust

to

where

dzey

were

last

set

by

the identified

drivcr.

?he

settings

can

also

be changed

by

briefly

pressing

one

of'

the

MELMORY

seat

brattoas

(

I

or

2)

located

on

the

driver's

door.

Wlzen

chsnges

are

made,

the

new

settings

will

be

saved

for

the

driver.

THEFTLOCK'"

is

designed

to

discourage theft

of

your

radio.

It

works

by

using

a

secret code

to

disable

ail

radio

functions whenever battery power

is

removed.

If

THEFTLOCK

is

active, the

TXEFTLBCK

indicator

wili3

Eash

when fie

ignition

is

off.

The

THEFTLOCK

featwe for the

radio

nay

be

used

01-

ignored.

If

igrP,ored,

the

system

plays

normai!y

and

the

radio

is

not protected

by

the feature.

If

THEFTLOCK

is

activated,

your

rdio

will

not

operate

if

stolen.

Wkn

THEmLBCK

is

activated, :he

radio

wilS

display

LOC

to

indicate

a

locked

cenditiora

anytime

battery

power

is

removed.

If

your

battery

loses

power

br

any

reason,

you

ness8

rrnlock

the

radio

with

the

secret

code

before

it

will

operate.

A.

1

2.

3.

4.

9.

Press

AM-FM

and

this

time

the

display

will

S~OW

SEC

f~

?et

YOG

how

that

your

radio

is

secure.

Enter

your secret code as

~Q~HOWS;

pause

no

more

than

15

seconds between

steps:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

LOC

appears when the igr,ition

is

on.

Press

MfN

and

880

will appear

on

the display.

Press

MHN

again

to

make

the

fast

two

digits agree

with

your code.

Press

HRS

to ~nake

the

first

one or

two

digits agree

Press

AM-FM

after

you have

confimed

that

the

code matches the secret code you

have

writ’een

down.

The

display

will

show

SEC,

indicating

the

radio

is

~QW

operable

and

secure.

with

your

code.

HE

you er,ter

the

wrong

code eight times,

INQP

will

appear

on

the

display.

Ygu

will

have

t~

wait

an

hour

with

the ignition

on

before

you

can try again. When

you

try

again, you

will

O~Y

have

three

more chances

(eight tries per chance)

to

enter the correc: code before

INOP

appears.

If

you lose

or

forget

your

code,

contact

your

dealer.

Enter

yorer secret code as

~OIEQWS;

pause

no

more

than

15

seconds between

steps:

1

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Turn

the ignition

to

ACCESSORY

or

RUN.

Turn

the radio

off.

Press

the

B

and

4

buttons together.

Hold

them

down

until

SEC

shows

on

the

display.

Press

MIN

and

000

will

appear

on

the display.

Press

MfN

again

to

make

the

last

two

digits agree

with

your

code.

Press

HRS

to

make

the

first

one or two digits agree

with

your

cocie.

Press

AI-FM

after

you

have

confkmed

that

the

code matches

the

secret code

you

have written

CIOWH~.

The

display

will

shaw

---,

indicating that the

radio

is

no longer

secured.

If

the

code

entered

is

inccnect,

SEC

will

appear

on

the

display.

The

radio

will remain

secured

until

the

correct

code

is

entered.

When

battery

power

is

removed and later applied

to

a

secured radio, the radio

won’t

turn

on

and

EQC

wirl

appear

on

the display.

To

unlock

a

secured radio see ‘6Udock.ing the

Thefi-Deterrent Feature After

a

Bower

LOSS”

earlier

in

this

section.

Audio

Steering

W3eel

c@ntr@ls

If

your

vehicle has this feature, can control certain

radio

functions using the buttons

on

your

steering wheel.

Some

steering

wheel

controls may operate climate

CO~&Q~S.

See “’Steering Wheel

Controls

for

Climate

Contd” earlier in

this

section.

button

to

SEEK:

Press this

go

to

the

next higher or

lower radio station.

SCAN:

Press

this

button

to

scan

the

stations

preset

on

your

radio

psaslnbuttons.

This

feature

works

like

your

radio’s

P

SCAN

button

and

allows

YOU

to

listen

to

each

of

you

preset stations

for

a

few seconds. The radio will

go

to

the

fist

preset

station,

stop

for

a

few seconds,

then

go

on

to

the

SCAN

again to

stop scanning.

If

a

preset

station

has

weak

reception, the

radio

will

mot

stop

at

the preset

st&hn~.

The

range

for

m~st

AM

stations

is

greater

than

for

I?”,

especially

at

might.

The

longer

range,

however,

can

came

stations

io

interfere

with

each

other.

AM

can

pick

up

noise

from

things

like

S~QITIIS

and

power

Eises.

Try

reducing

the

treble

to

reduce

this

noise

iE

you

ever get it.

Your

tape player

should

be cleaned regularly after every

50 hours

of

use.

Your

raciio

may

display

CLM

to

indicate

that

you

have used

your

tape player

€or

50

hours

~ith~ut

resetting the tape clean timer.

€f

this

message appears

om

the

display,

your

cassette

tape

player needs

to

be

cleaned.

It

will

still

play

tapes,

but

you

should

clean

it

as

SOOR

as

possible

to prevent damage

to

your tapes

and.

known

good

cassette to see if it

is

the tape

or

the

tape

player

at

fault.

If

this other cassette has

EO

improvement

in

sound

quality,

clean the tape player.

pkiYLX.

If

Y0t.i

IIOtiCe

a

redPrCtiOn

iEm

SOUd

quality,

&j‘

a

After

ycu

clean

the

player,

press

and

hold

EJECT

for

five

seconds

to

reset the

CLN indicator.

The

rxlio

will

display

---

to

show

the indicator

was

reset.

Cassettes me subject to wear

md

the

sound

quality

may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette

tape

is

in

good

condition before you have

YOLK

tape

player serviced.

yax-ipa

(..k

n,;T

7;:

yudr

-.,:

!Lamp@&

'7

U&pJ

27.

:

-

Handle discs carefully. Store

them

in

their original cases

or

other protective cases and away

from

direct

sunlight

and

dust.

If

the surface

of

a

disc is

soiled,

danpem

a

clean,

soft

~10th

in

a

mild,

neutral detergent

sdution and

clean

it,

wiping

from

the center

to

the edge.

Be

sure never

to

touch the signal

surface

when

handking

discs.

Pick

up

discs

by

grasping

the

outer edges

or

the

edge

of

the

kte

and

the outer edge.

Your

AM-FM

antenna

is

integrated with

yorrr

rear

window defogger, located

in

the

rex

window.

Be

sure

that the inside surface

sf

the

rear

window

is

not

scratched

and

that the lines

QI-I

the

glass

are

not

damaged.

If

the inside surface is damaged, it could

interfere

with

radio reception.

Do

not

apply aftermarket

glass tinting.

The

metallic

film

in some tinting

materials

will

interfere

with

OH

distort

the

incoming

radio

reception.

If,

when

YOU

turn

on

your

rear window defogger,

you

hear static

on

your radio station, it means

a

defogger

grid

line has been damaged

and

must

be repaired.

(Your

rlldiQ

iS

not

at

fault.)

X

you

C~OQS~

to

add

a

cejlular

telephone

to

your

vehicle, and the mtenma needs

to

be attached to the

glass, be

sure

that

you

do

not

damage the grid lines

for

the

AlV-FM

zn'renna.

4-

2

4-3

4-5

4-6

4-

10

4-43

4-

13

4-

15

4.-

I6

The

best advice anyone

can

give about driving is:

Drive defensively.

Please

start

with

a very

important

safety device

in

your

Buick:

Buckle

up.

(See “’Safety Belts” in the Index.)

Defensive driving redly means “be ready

for

mything.”

On

city streets,

rural

roads

or

freeways,

it means

“always expect

the

unexpected.”’

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going

to

be

careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might

do.

Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions

are

about the most preventable of

accidents.

Yet

they are common. Allow enough

following distance. It’s the best defensive driving

maneuver, in

both

city and

wd

driving. You never

know when

the

vehicle

in

front

of

you is going to brake

or suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate

on

the driving task. Anything that distracts

from

the

driving task

--

such as concentrating

on

a

cellular

telephone call, reading, or reaching for something

on

the floor

--

makes proper defensive driving more

difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting

injury.

Ask

a passenger to help do things like

this,

or

pull

off

the

road

in a safe place to

do

them yourself.

These simple defensive driving techniques coukl save

your Me.

4-2

Death and injury associated

with

drinking

and

driving is

a

national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor

to

the

highway death toll, claiming thousands

of

victims

every

year.

AIcohol

affects

four things that anyone needs

to

drive

a

vehicle:

0

Judgment

@

Muscular Coordination

8

vision

Attentiveness.

Police records

show

that almost

half

of

all

motor

vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,

these

deaths

are

the

result

of

someone

who

was drinking

and

driving.

In

recent years, over

17,000

annud motor

vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the

use

of

alcohol,

with

more than

300,000

people

injured.

Many adults

--

by

some estimates, nearly

half

the

adult

population

--

choose never

to

drink alcohol,

so

they

never

drive after drinking.

For

persons under

2

I,

it’s

against the

law

in

every

U.S.

state

to

drink alcohol.

There are

good

medical, psychological

and

developmental reasons

for

these

laws.

The

obvious

way

to

solve

this

highway safety pmblem

is

for

people never

to

drink alcohol and then drive.

But

what

if

people

do?

Wow much is

“too

much“

if

the

driver

plans

to drive?

It’s

a

lot less than

many

might

think.

Although

it

depends

on

each person

and

situation,

here

is

some general information

on

the

problem.

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if

the same person

drank

thee double

martinis

(3

ounces

or

540

d

of

liquor

each) within

an

hour,

the

person’s

BAC

would be close to

0.12

percent.

A

person who

consumes food just before

or

during drinking will have a

somewhat Bower

BAC

level.

There

is

a gender difference,

too.

Women generally have

a

Bower

relative percentage

of

body water

than

men.

Since alcohol

is

carried

in

body water, this

means

that

a

WQ~ZUI

generally will reach a higher

BAC

level

than

a

man of her

same

body weight when each

has

the same

number of

chinks.

The law in many

U.S.

states sets the legal limit

at

a

BAC

of

0.10

percent.

Hn

a

growing number

of

U.S.

states,

and

throughout

Canada,

she limit is

64.08

percent.

Ina

some

other countries, it’s even Bower. The

BAC

limit

for

all

commercial drivers

in

the United States

is

8.04

percent.

The

BAC

will be over 0.10 percent after three

to

six

drinks

(in

one hour).

Of

course,

as

we’ve seen, it

depends

on

how much alcohol

is

in

the

drinks,

and

how

quickly the person

drinks

them.

But

the

ability

to

drive is affected well below

a

BAC

of

0.10 percent. Research shows

that

the driving skills

of

many

people

are

impaired

at a

BAC

approaching

0.05 percent,

and

that

the effects are worse at night.

All drivers

are

impaired at

BAC

levels above

0.05

percent. Statistics

show

that the chance

of

being in

a

collision increases

sharply

for drivers who have

a

BAC

of

0.05

percent or above. A driver with a

BAC

level

of

0.06

percent

has

doubled

his

or

her chance

of

having a

CO~~S~OIL

At

a

BAC

level

of

0.10

percent, the

chance

of

this

driver having a collision is

12

times

greater;

at

a level

of

0.15 percent, the chance

is

25

times greater!

YO:;

have

three

systems

that

make

YQLX

vehick

go

wircre

you

want

it

to

go. They are

the

brakes,

the

steering

anti

the accelerator.

AH

three

systems

have

to

do

their

work

at

the

places where

the

tires

meet the

road.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving

on

snow or ice, it’s

easy

to

ask more

of

hose

control systems

than

the tires

and road can provide.

That

means you can lose control

of

your vehicle.

Braking

action

involves

perreption time

and

reaction time.

First, you have to decide

to

push on the brake pedal.

That’s

perception

time.

Then you have

to

bring

up your

foot

and do it. That’s

reaction time.

Average

reaction time

is about

314

of

a second. But

that’s

only

an

average. It might be less with one driver

and as long

as

two

OS

three seconds or more

with

another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination

and eyesight

dl

play

a

part.

So

do alcohol, drugs and

frustration. But even

in

3/4

of

a second, a vehicle

moving at

60

mpph

(100

km/h)

travels

66

feet

(20

m).

That could be a lot

of

distance

in

an

emergency,

so

keeping enough space between your vehicle and

others

is important.

And,

of

course, actual stopping distances

vary

greatly

with the surface

of

the road (whether it’s pavement or

gravel); the condition

of

the

road

(wet,

dry,

icy); tire

tread; the condition

of

your

brakes; the weight

of

the

vehicle and the

amount

of

brake force applied.

Avoid

Reedless heavy

braking.

Some

people

drive

in

spurts

--

heavy acceleration followed by heavy

braking

--

rather

than

keeping pace with

traffic.

This

is

a

mistake.

Your

brakes

may

not

have time

to

COO^

between

hard

stops.

Your

brakes

will

wear

out

much

Easter

if

you

dc

a

lot

of

heavy

braking.

If

YOU

keep

pace with

the

traffic

‘ad

allow

realistic follewing

distances,

you

will

eliminate

a

lot

of

unnecessary braking.

That

means

better

braking

and longer brake life.

If

your

engine

ever

steps

while

you’re

driving,

brake

nomctHBy

but

don’t

pump

your

brakes.

HE

you

do,

the

pedal

may

get

harder

to

push

down.

If

your engine

stops,

you

will

still

have some

power

brake

assist.

But

you

will use it when

you

brake.

Once the power assist is

used

up,

it

may

take longer

to

stop

and

the brake

pedal

will

be

hxder

to

push.

.....

...

..,.

.

.......

....

......

You

can

steer

around

the

obstacle while braking

hard.

As

you brake,

your

CQIII~U~~I-

keeps receiving updates on

wheel

speed

and

c~ntgols braking pressure accordingly.

Remember:

Anti-lock

doesn’t change the the

you

need

to

get

your

foot

up

to

the br&e pedal or always

decrease

stopping

distance.

If

you

get

too

dose

to

the

vehicle

in

front

of

you,

you

won’t

have time

to

apply

your

brakes

If

that

vehicle suddenly

slows

or

stcps.

Always

leave

enough

room

up

ahead tu

stop,

even

though

yorr

have

anti-lock

brakes.

Don’t

pump

the

brakes. Just

hold

the

brake

pedal

down

5mly

and

let anti-lock

work

for

you.

You

may

feel

a

slight brake pedal

gulsation

or

notice

some

noise,

but

this

is

normal.

?F?

5-~~l:”~p.Tp

LC

:~?$<:4:?~$

,y...,iq:py;

(TF

&&@$B&)

r

,y

a%

*.-blL&

.

,%*i

...,‘.

--’3

li

Y

z

.i

I

A

-2.

YQW

vehicle

may

have

a

traction

control system

thzat

limits

wheel spin. This is especially useful

in

slippery

road

conditions. The system operates only

if

it

senses

that one

or

both

of

the

front

wheels are spinning

or

beginning

to

lose

traction.

When

this

happens,

the

system

works

the front

brakes

and reduces engine power

to

limit wheel spin.

You

may feel

or

hear

the

system working,

but

this

is

nomal.

__

.

...

a

See

‘‘T~-acti~m

Contra1

System

Warning

Eight”

ii:

the

Irzdex.

WEen

this

warning

light

is

on,

the

system

will

mt

limit

wheel

spin.

Adjust

your

driving

zccsrdingly.

The

traction

COII~FO~

system arr;2smaticaily comes

on

whenever

you

start

your

vehicle.

To

limit

wheel

spin,

especially

in

siippery

road

conditio~s,

y3u

shouEd

always

leave the system on.

But

you

can

turn-

the

traction

control system

off‘

if

you

ever need

to.

(YQQ

should

turn

the

system

off

if

pur

vehicBe

ever

gets

stuck

in

sand,

mud,

ice

or

snow.

See

“Rockr~g

Your

Vehicle”

in

the

Index.)

To

turn

the

system

off,

press

the

button l~cated

at

the

end

of

the

shift

lever.

The

traction control system

warning

light

will

come

on

and

stay

on.

If

the system

is

limiting wheel

spin

when

you

press

the

button, the

warning

light

will

come

on

--

but

the

system

won’t

turn

off

right

away.

It

will

wait

until

there’s

no

longer

a

current

need

to

hit

wheel

spin.

Ym

can

turn

the

system back on

at

any

time

by

pressing

?.he

button

again.

The

traction

control system warning

Bi&

xkcPetM

go

off.

Your vehicle

may

be

equipped

with

GM

Magnasteer

”

,

a

steering

system

that

continuousIy

adjusts

the effort you

feel

when

steering

at

all

vehicle

speeds.

It

provides

ease

when parking

yet

a

firm,

solid

feel

at

highway

speeds.

You-

steering can be adjusted

for

an

easier

or

more

firm

setting.

See

your

dealer

for

information

It‘s

important

to

take curves

at

;r

reasonable speed.

A

lot

of

the

“driver

lost

control” accidents mentioned

on

the

news happen

on

curves. Here’s

why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each

of

us

is

subject

to

the

same

laws

of

physics when driving

on

curves.

The

traction

of

the

tires

agzjinst

the

roaC

surface makes

it

possible

fcr

the vehicle

to

change

its

path

when

you

turn

the

front wheels.

If

there’s

no

traction, inertia

wiHl

keep

the vehicle going in

the

same direction.

If

you‘ve

ever

tried

to

steer

a

vehicle

on

wet

ice,

YQK‘IB

understacd

this.

The

trzctionr

YOU

can

get

in

a

curve depends

on

the

condition

of

your

tires

md

the

road

surface, the angle at

which Gie curve

is

banked,

and

your speed.

Mile

you’re

in

ip

curve, speed

is

the

one fxtor

you

can

control.

Suppose

ycu’re

steering

through

a

sharp

curve.

Then

you

suddenly

accelerate.

Both

control

&3g;-izg

1x1

0

&i&rpe[z.iQs

7,ww

e?

There are times when steering can be more effective

than

brakmg. For example, you

come

over a

hill

and

find

a

truck stopped in your lane, or

a

car suddenly

pulls

out from nowhere,

OH

a

child

darts

out

from between

parked

cars

md

stops right

in

front

of

YOU.

You

can

avoid these problems by

braking

--

if

you

can

stop

in

time.

But

sometimes

you

can’t; trlere isn’t room. That’s

the time

for

evasive action

--

steering

~ound

the problem.

Your

vehicle can perform very well in emergencies

like

these.

First

apply your

brakes.

(See

‘‘Braking

in

Emergencies” earlier

in

”s

section.)

It

is better

tc

remove as much speed as you can from

a

possible

collision.

Then steer around the

problem,

to

the

left

or

right

depending

on

the

space

available.

An

emergency

like

this

requires close attention

and

a

quick

decision.

If

you

are

holding

the steering

wheel

a’:

the recomended

9

and

3

o’clock

positloas,

you can

tuna

it

a

full

180

degrees

very

quickly

without

removing

either

hand.

But

you

have

to

act

fast, steer quickly,

and

just

as

quickly

straighten

the

wheel

once

you

have

avoided the

object.

The

fact that such emergency situations

are

always

possible

is

a

good

reason

to

practice defensive

driving

at

dl

times and wear safety

belts

properly.

@

I4o

not

get

too

ciose

to

the

vehicle

you

want

to

pass

while

you’re

awaiting

an

opportunity.

For

one

thing,

fblhwing

too

closely reduces

YQUP

area

of

visiorn,

cspecidly

if

you’re

following

a

larger vehide.

Also,

you

won’t

have adequate space

if

the vehicle

ahead

suddenly

slows

cx

stops. Keep back

a

reasonable distance.

8

When

it

looks

like a chance

to

pass

is

coming

up,

start

to

accelerate

but

stay

in

the right lane

and

don‘t

get

too

close.

Time

YOUF

move

so

you

will

be

increasing speed as

the

time

comes to move into the

other lane.

If

the way

is

clear

to

pass,

you

will

have

a

“running

start”

that more

than

makes

up

for

the

distance

you

would lose

by

dropping

back.

And

if

something happens

to

cause

you

to

cancef

your

pass,

you need only

slow

down

and

drop back again and

wait

for

another

opportunity.

If

other cars

=e

lined

up

to

pass

a

slow

vehicle, wait

your

turn.

But

take

care that someone isn’t

trying

to

pass

YOU

as

you

pull

out

+LO

pass

the

slow

vehicle.

Remember

to

glance over your

shoulder

and check

the

blind

spot.

8

Check

your

minors,

giance over

your

shoulder,

and

start

your

left

Bane change

signal

before moving

out

of

the

right

lane

to

pass.

When

you

=e

far

enough

ahead

of

the passed vehicle

BO

see

its

front

in

your

inside

minor,

activate your

right

lafie change

signal

2nd

move back

into

the

right

laze. (Remember that

your

right

outside

mirror

is

convex. The vehicle

YSU

just passed

may

seem

to

be f~ther away

from

you

than

it

really

is.)

@

Don’t

overtake

a

sEowIy moving vehdcIe

too

rapidly.

Even

though

the

br&e

lamps

are

not flashing,

it

may

be

slowing

down

or

starting

to

turn.

@

If

you’re

being

passed,

make it easy

for

the

foilowing driver

to

get

ahead

of

you.

Perhaps

you

can

ease

a

littie

to

the

right.

A

cornering

skid

is

best

handled

by

easing

your

EQOT

OE

the

accelerator

pedal.

If

you

have

the

traction control system, remember:

It

helps

avoid

only the

acceleration

skid.

.,

. .

....

.............

..

.....

...................

._

................

..

....

..

...

...............

..

.......

............

.....

x.:;-..

:

..

.......

:.

::.

.i*&

-\\.w-,.+

w-:x

):.:..:.~.:.:.:.:.~.:~

-.:.:x.:.:..,

..........

....................

..........

........

................i‘.;..

.......

Night driving is more dangerous

than

day driving.

One reason

is

that some drivers are likely

to

be

impaired

--

by alcohol

or

drugs,

with

night

vision

problems,

or

by fatigue.

Here are some tips

on

night

driving.

Drive defensively.

Don’t

chi&

and drive.

Adjust your inside rearview

III~JTQ~

to

reduce the

glare from headlamps behind you.

Since you can’t see

as

well, you may need

to

slow down

and

keep more space between

you

and

other vehicles.

Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.

Your

headlamps can light up only

so

much

road

ahead.

In

remote areas, watch

for

animals.

If

you’re tired,

pull

off

the road in

a

safe place

and rest.

Driving

too

fast

through large water

puddles

or

even

going

through some

car

washes can

cause

problems,

too.

The water may affect your brakes.

Try

to

avoid puddles.

But

if

you

can’t,

try

to

slow

down

before

you

hit them.

Hydroplaning

is

dangerous.

S:,

much

water can

build

up

under your

tires

that they

cm

actually ride

on

the water.

This

can

happerm

If

the

road

is

wet

enough

and you’re

going fast enough. When your vehicle

is

hydroplaning,

it

has

little

or

no contact with

the

road.

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen

often.

But

it can if your

tires

do

not

have much tread

or

if

the

pressure

in

one

or

more

is

low.

It

can happen

if

a

lot

of

water

is

standing

on

the road.

If

you can see reflections

from

trees, telephone

poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the

water’s surface, there could

be

hydroplaning.

4-2

Mile

for

mile,

freeways

(dso

called

thruways, parkways,

expressways,

turnpikes

or

superhighways)

are

the safest

of

dl

roads.

But

they have

their

QWII

special

rules.

The

most

important

advice

on

freeway

driving

is:

Keep

UP

with

tp.&c

and

keep

to the

right. Drive

at

the

same

speed

most

of

the other

drivers

are

driving.

T~o-fast

or

too-slow

driving

breaks a

smooth

traffic

flow.

Treat

the

left

lane

on

a

fkeeway

as

a

passing

lane.

At

the entrance, there

is

usually

a

ramp

that leads

to

the

freeway.

If

you have

a

clear view

of

the freeway

2s

you

drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to

check traffic.

Try

to determine where

you

expect

to

blend with the

flow.

Try

to merge

into

the

gap at close to

the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check

your

mirrors

and

glance over

your

shoulder as often

as

necessary.

Try

to

blend

smoothly

with the traffic

flow.

Once

you

are

on

the freeway, adjust your speed

to

the

posted limit or

to

the prevailing rate

if

it’s

slower. Stay

in

the right

lane

unless you

want

to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your

rnkors.

Then use

your

turn

signal.

Just

before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your

shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your

“bIind”

spot.

Once

YOU

are

moving

on

the

freeway, make certain

you

allow

a

reasonable following distance.

Expect

to

move

slightly dower at night.

When you want

to

leave the freeway, move to

the

proper

lane well

in

advmce.

If

you

miss

your

exit,

do

not,

under any circumstances, stop

and

back

up.

Drive

cn

to

the next exit.

The exit

ramp

can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

The exit speed

is

usually

posted.

Reduce your speed according to

YOUP

speedometer,

not

to

your

sense

of

motion. After driving for any distance

at higher speeds,

you

may

tend

to

think you are going

slower than you actually

are.

4-22

Make

sure you’re ready.

Try

to

be

wel

rested.

if

par

must

start

when

you’re

not

fresh

--

such

as

after

a

day’s

wo&

--

don’t

plan

to

make

too

many

des

that

Eirst

part

of

the

journey.

Wew

comhrta’ole

ciothing

and

shoes

you

can

easily

drive

in.

1s

your

vehick ready

for

a

Iong

trip?

If

ycu

keep

it

serviced

mb

maintained,

it’s

ready to

go.

If

it

needs

service, have

it

done

before

starting

out.

Of

course,

you’ET

find

experienced and able service experts

in

Buickdealerships

ail

across

North

America.They’!l be

ready and

willing

to

help

if

you

need

it.

Here

are

some

things

you

can

check

befme

a

trip:

]Is

there

actually

such

a

~~nrdition

as

“highway

hypnosis”?

Or

is

it just

plain

falling

asleep

at

the wheel?

Call

it

highway

hypnosis, lack

of

awareness,

or

whatever.

mere

is

something

about

an

easy stretch

of

road

with

the

same

scenery,

dong

with the

hum

of

the tires

on

the

road, the &one

of

the

engine,

and

the

msh

of

the

wind

against the vehicle

that

can

make

you

sleepy.

Don’t

let

it

happen

to

you!

If

it does, your

vehicle

can

leave

the

road

in

less

than

a

secondy

and

you

could

crash

agld

be

injured.

@

Keep

YQW

eyes moving.

Scan

the

road

ahead

and

to

the sides. Check

YOLK

rearview

~~II-QI-S

and

your

instruments frequently.

@

If

you

get sleepy, pull

off

the

road

into

a

rest,

service

or

parking area

and

take

a

nap,

get some exercise,

or

both.

For safety, treat

drowsiness

on

the highway

as

an

emergency.

HE

you drive

regdarly

in

steep country, or

if

you're

planning

to

visit there, here are some

tips

that

can

make

your

trips safer

and

more enjoyable.

Keep yoas vehicle in

good

shape. Check

all

fluid

Bevels

and

also the brkes, tires, cooling system

and

transaxle.

These

par"cs

can

work

had

on

mountain

roads.

8

Know

how

to

go

down

hills.

"he

most

imp~rtmt

thing

to

how

is

this:

le:

your

engine

do

some

of

the

slowing

~QWII.

Shift to

a

lower gear

whm

YOU

go

down

a

steep

or

long

hill.

b

If

you

ddt

shift

down,

your

brakes

coddl

get

so

hot

that

they

wouldn't

work

wel.

YQU

would

then

have

poor

braking

or even

none

going

down

a

hill.

You

could

crash.

Shift

down

to

Bet

your

engine

assist

YOW

brakes

on

a

steep

downhill

slope.

8

a,

Know

how

to

go

uphill.

Drive

in

the highest

geX

pOSSibke.

Stay

in

your

own

lane

when

driving

an

two-lane

roads

in

hills

or

mountains.

Don't

swing

wide

GT

cut

across the center

of

the

road.

Drive

at

speeds

tha':

let

you

stay

in

your

own

lane.

As

yo.^

go

over the

top

of

a

-hill,

be

dert.

There

could

be

somettzlng

h

you-

lane,

%e

a

stailed

car

or

m

accident.

You

may

see

highway

signs

on

mountains

that

wanz

of

specid

problems.

Examples

ae

H~ng

grades,

passing

or

no-passing

zones,

a

falling

rocks

area

or

winding

roads.

Be

alert

to

these

and

take appropriate

zction.

p..........

...........-

............

.........................

gg.&.$&

..............

Here

are

some

tips

for winter driving:

hclude

an

ice scraper,

a

smdl

brush

or broom,

a

supply

of

windshield washer

fluid,

a

rag,

some

winter outer

clothing,

a

small shovel,

a

flashlight, a red

cloth

and

a

couple

of

reflective warning triangles.

And,

if

you

will.

be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag

of

sand,

a

piece

of

old

carpet or

a

couple

of

burlap bags

to

help provide traction.

Be

sure

you

pperly secure

these items

in

YOU

vehicle.

However, if there is

snow

OF

ice between

yorar

tires

and

the

road,

you

can

have

a

very slippery situation.

You’ll

have

a

lot

less traction

cr

“grip”

and

will

need

to

be

very careful.

..........

..--

...

..

‘

_._

,

.....

What’s

the

worst

time

for

this? “Wet ice.” Very

cold

snow

or

ice can be slick

2nd

hard

to

drive

on.

3ut

wet

ice can be even more trouble because

it

may

oEer

the

least

traction

of

all.

You

can

get wet ice when

it’s

about

freezing

(,32”F;

OOC)

and freezing

rain

begins

to

fail.

Try

to

avoid driving

on

wet ice

until

salt

2nd

sand

crews

can

get

there.

Whatever the condition

--

smooth

ice,

packed,

blowing

or

hose

snow

--

drive with caution.

If

you have traction control, keep

the

systcrn

on.

It

will

improve your ability

to

accelerate

when

driving

on

a

slippery

road.

Even

though

your

vehicle

has

a

traction

controi system,

you’ll

want

to

slow

down

and

adjust

your driving to the road conditions.

Sec

‘‘Trrrctionr

Control

System”

in the Index.

If

you

don’t

have the traction

control

system, accelerate

gently.

Try

not to break

thc

FragiEt:

Fraction.

If

you

acceierate

too

fast, the drive

wheels

will

spin

and

polish

the surface under

the

tires

even

more.

Your anti-lock

brakes

irr;.lp~~e your vehicle’s stability

when

you

make

a

hard

stop

on

a

slippery road. Even

though

you

have

the

anti-lock

braking

system,

p~’i8

want

to

begin stopping sooner than

you

would

on

dry

pavement. See “Anti-Lock)’

in

the

Index.

@

Allow

greater

following

distance

on

a~y

@

Watch

for

slippery

spots.

The road might

be

he

until

you

hit

a

spot

that’s

covered

with

ice.

Ora

an

otherwise clew

road,

ice patches may appear in

shaded

areas where

the

sun

can’t reach:

around

clumps

of

trees, behind buildings

or

under bridges.

Sometimes the surface

of

a

curve or

an

overpass

may

remain icy when the

surrounding

roads

are cka.

ff

you

see

a

patch

of

ice ahead

of

you,

br&e before

you

are

on

it.

Try

not

to

br&e

while you’re actually

on

the ice,

and

avoid

sudden steering maneuvers.

slippery

road.

If

you

are

stopped by heavy

snow,

you

couId

be

in

a

serious

situation.

YOE

skhoald

prsbably

stay

witk

your

vehicle unless

you

know

for

sure

that

you

are

zear

help

and

you

cas hike

through

the

snow.

Here

are

some

things to

do

to

SUH~~QEZ

kip

and

keep

yourself

and

~QUI-

passengers

safe:

@

Turn

on

your

hazard

flashers.

i

T!RE-LOADING

tNFBRMAT!ON

OCCUPANTS

VEHICLE

CAP.

WT.

FRT.

CTR.

RR.

TOTAL

LBS.

KG

1

MAX.

LOADING

€9

GVWR

SAME

AS

VEHICLE

i

CAPACITY

WEIGHT

X>(>(

COLD

TIRE

SIZE

SPEED

PRESSURE

RTG

PSI:KPa

IF

TIRES

ARE

HOT,

ADD

4PSIj28KPa

SEE

OWNER'S

MANUAL

FOR

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Two

labels

on

pur

vehicle

show

how

much

weight

it

may

properly

cmy.

The

Tire

Loading

Information label

found

on

the rea edge

of

the

driver's

door

tells

YOU

the

groper

size,

speed rating

and

recommended inflation

pressures

for

the

tires

on

your

vehicle.

It

also

gives

you

important

infomation

about

the number

of

people

that

can

be in

your

vehicle

and

the total weight

that

you

can

carry.

This

weight

is

called the Vehicle Capacity Weight

and

includes

the weight

of

all

occupants, cargo,

and

all

nonfactory-instalM

QP~~QP~S.

MFD

BY

GENERAL MOTORS

COWP

DATE

GVWW

GAWR

FRT

GAWR

RW

The other label

is

the

Certification Label.

found on

the

rear

edge

cf

the

driver's

door.

it

tells

ycu

the

gross

weight capacity

of

your

vehicle, called

the

Gross

vehicle

Weight Rating

(GVW).The

GVWR

includes

the weight

of

the vehicle,

all

occupants.

fuel

and

cargo.

Never exceed the

GWR

for

your vehicle,

or

the

Gross

Axle

Weight Rating

(GAWR)

foreither

the

front

or

rear

axle.

YOUr

WEtE'ralI~y

does

COWX

gSa€%S

03.

components

that

fail

because

of

overloading.

Hf

you

put

things

inside

your

vehicle

--

like

suitcases,

tools,

packages,

or

anything

else

--

they will

go

as

fast

as

the vehicle goes.

If

YOU

have to

stop

or

turn

quickly,

or

if

there

is

a

crash,

they'll

keep

going.

Your

vehicie

can tow a trailer

if

it

is

equipped

with

the

proper trailer towing

equipment.

To

identify

what

the

vehicle trailering capacity

is

far

your

vehick, you

shora'rd

read

the

infomation

in

"Weight

of

the

Trailer"

that

appears later

in

this

section.

But

trailerifmg

is

differect

than

just

driving

your

vehicle

by

itself.

Trailering

neans

changes

in

handling,

durability

and

fuel

economy. Successful,

safe

tmilering

takes

correct

equipment, and

it

has

to

be

used

properly.

4-32

. .

I~

Eszd-pulling

components such

as

the engine,

transaxle.

wheel assembiles

and

tires

%e

forced

ea

work

harder

against

the

drag

uf

the added weight.

The

engine

is

required

to

operate at reEativeIy higher

speeds

and

gnder

grczter

Isads,

gecerating extra

heat.

What's more,

the

trailer

adds

considerably

to

wid

resistance,

increasing

the

pulling requirements.

If

You

Do

Decide

To

PnlI

A

Railerr

If

you

do,

here

are

some

irqm-tana

points:

There

are

mmy

different

laws,

inclndlng

speed

Zimit

restrictions, having to

do

with

trailerkg

Make

sure

your

rig

will

be

legal,

not

only

where

yolr

live

but

also

where

you'll

be

driving.

A

good

source

for

this

infomation

can

be

state

or'

provincial

peke.

If

you’re using

a

weight-carrying

hitch,

the

trailer

tongue

(A)

should weigh

18

percent

of

the

total

loaded

trailer weight

(B).

If

yog

have

a

weight-distributing

hitch, the

trziler

tongue

(A)

should

weigh

12

percent

of

the

total

ioaded trailer weight

(B).

After you’ve

loaded

your

trailer, weigh the trailer

and

then the tongue, separately,

to

see

if

the weights

are

proper.

If

they

aren’t,

YOU

may be able

to

get them

right

simply

by moving some items

around

in

the traiier.

Be sure your vehicle’s tires

are

inflated

to

the

Gpper

limit

for

cold

tires.

You’ll

find these numbers on the

Tire-Loading Information Babel at

the

rear edge

of

the

driver’s

door

OF

see

“Loading

Your

Vehicle”

in

the

Index.

Then

be sure you

don’t

go

over

the

GVW

limit

for

your

vehicle,

including

the weight

sf

the

trailer tongue.

I--

LL&LA2Lb

q

;

-I

,-+

1

It’s

important

to

have

the

correct

hitch

equipment.

Crosswinds,

large trucks going

by

and

rough

roads are

a

few reasons why you’ll need

the

right

hitch.

Were are

some des to follow:

Be

sure

to

read

and

follow

the

ins~srctions

for

the

t~tile~

brdw

so

you’ll

be

able

to

install,

adjust

ad

maintain

them

properly.

8

You’ll Zeed

more

passing

distance

up

ahead

when

gr~u’re

towing

a

trailer.

And,

because

you’re

a

good

deal

longer,

you‘ll geed

to

go

much

farther

beyond

the

passed

vehicle

bef0re

you

cas

return

to

your

lane.

4-36

3.

Drive

slowly

until

the

trailer

is

clear

of

the

chocks.

4.

Stop

and have

someone pick

up

and

store the chocks.

Mere

YOLI’HH

find

what

to do

about

some problems

that

can

occur

the

road.

5-2

5-3

5-7

5-

12

Hazard

Warning

Flashers

Other

Warning

Devices

Towing

Your

Vehicle

Engine

Overheating

sump

Starting

h..,,

-

.

'

YQW

hazard

warning

flashers

work

no

matter

what

position yow key

is

in,

and

even if the

key

isn't

in.

To

turn

off

the flashers, press down

on

the

button again.

When the

hazard

warning flashers are

CUI,

your

turn

signals

won't

work.

your

vehicle.

1.

Check the other vehicle.

It

must have

a

12-volt

battery with a negative ground system.

2.

Get the vehicles close enough

so

the jumper cables

can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching

each other.

If

they are,

it

could

cause

a

ground

connection

YOU

don’t

want.

YQU

wouldn’t be able

to

start

your vehicle,

and

the bad grounding could

damage

the

electrical systems.

TQ

avoid the possibility

of

the vehicles rolling, set

the

parking brake firmly

on

both

vehicles involved.

Put

an

automatic transaxle in

PARK

(PI

before

setting the parking brake.

3.

’hm

off

the

ignition

on

5~1th

vehicles.

Turn

off

the

radios

and

all

lamps

that

aren’t

needed.

This

will

avoid

sparks

and

help save

both

batteries.

Et

could

save

YSUP

radio!

damaged.

The

repairs

wouldn’t

be

covered

by

your

warranty.

4.

Open

the

hood

and

locate

the

batteries.

6.

Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose

or

missing insulation.

If

they

do,

you

could get a

shock

and

the vehicles could be damaged.

Before

you

connect the cables, here are

SOW

basic

things

you

should

know.

Positive

(9)

will

go

to

positive

(+)

and

negative

(-)

will

go to a metal

engine

pa.

Don’t connect positive

(+)

to

negative

(-1

or

you’ll get

a

short

that

would

damage the

battery

and

maybe other

parts,

too.

7.

Connect the red positive

(9)

cable to the positive

(+>

terminal

of

the

vehicle

with

the dead battery. Use a

remote positive

(+)

terminal

if

the vehicle has one.

8.

Don’t let the other

end

t~~h

metal. Connect it

to

the positive

(+)

terminal

of

the

good

battery. Use

a

remote

positive

(9)

terminal

if

the

vehicle

has

one.

NOW

connect

the

black

negative

(-)

cable

to

the

good

battery’s

negative

(-)

terminal.

Don’t

let the other end

touch anytkzng

until

the

The

other

end

of

the

negative cable

doem

Z

go

to

the

dead

battery.

It

goes

to

a

heavy

unpainted metal

part

on

the

engine

of

the vebcle

with

the dead battery.

...................

............

....................

.......

.........

...

........

..

...

.....

...........

.........

IO.

Attach the cable at least

18

inches

(45

cm)

away

from

the

dead battery, but

not

near engine

parts

that

move.

The

electrical connection

is

just

as

good

thee,

but

the chance

of

sparks

getting

back

to

the

battery

is

much

less.

11.

Now

star&

the

vehicle

with

the

good

battery

and

run

the

engine

for

a

while.

..

!:

:.

1%.

Try

to

start

the

vehicle with

the

dead battery.

_. .

If

it

won’t

start

&er

a

few tries,

it

probably

A.

Heavy

Metal

Engine

Part

B.

Good

Battery

C.

Dead Battery

.:,:’

.

+

..

needs

service.

..

,..

.I

..

2

A

vehicle

can

fall

from

a

car

carrier

if

it

isn’t

adequately secured.

This

can cause

a

collision,

serious

personal

injury

and vehicle damage.

The

vehicle should be tightly secured with chains

OF

steel cables before it

is

transported.

Don’t

use

substitutes

(ropes,

leather

straps,

canvas webbing, etc.) that can

be

cut

by

sharp

edges underneath the towed vehicje. Always

use

T-hooks inserted in the T-hook

siob.

Never

use

J-hooks.

They will damage drivetrain

and

suspension

components.

When your vehicle

is

being

towed,

have

the

ignition key

in

OW.

The

steering

wheel

should

be clamped

in

a.

straight-ahead

position,

with

a

clamping

device

designed

for

towing

service.

DQ

not

use

the

vehicle’s

steering

column

iock for

this.

The

transaxle

should

be

in

NEUTRAL

(N)

and the

parking

brake

released.

Don’t

have your vehicle towed

the

front

wheels,

unless

you

must.

If

the vehicle

must

be

towed

QII

the

front

wheels,

be

sure

to

fallow

the

speed

and

distance

restrictions

later

in

this

section or

your

transaxle

will

be

damaged.

If

these

Limits

must

be

exceeded, then

the

front

wheels

have

to

be

supported

on

a

dolly.

............

...

\,

............

........

A

h:;

8.

Position

the lower

sling

crossbar

in

front

of

the

rear

bumper.

E

you

get

the overheat

wming

but see

or

hear

no

steam,

the

problem

may

not

be

too serious.

Sometines

the engine can get

a

BittIe

too

hot

when

you:

@B

Climb

a

long

hill

on

a

hot day.

8

Stop after high-speed driving.

Idle

for

long

periods in

tra€€ic.

9

Tow

a

trailer.

If

you

get

the

overheat warning with sign

of

stem,

try

this

for

a

mimte or

so:

I.

Turn

off

your

air conditioner.

2.

Turn

on

your

heater

to

full

hot

at

the

highest

Fan

speed

and

opera

the window

as

necessary.

otherwise, shift

to

the

highest gear while

driving

--

AUTOMATIC

OVERDRIVE

(a)

or

THmD

(3

1.

3.

If

you're

Ira

a

tra€fic

jam,

shift

to

NEUTRAL

(N);

If

you

1'10

longer

have the overheat

wmimg,

you

can

drive.

Just

to

be

safe, drive slower

for

about

IO

minutes.

If

the warning doesn't come

back

on,

you

can

drive

normally.

If

the warning continues,

pull

over,

stop,

and

park

your

vehicle right away.

If

there's still

no

sign

of

steam,

YOU

can idle the engine

for

two or three minutes while you're

parked,

to see

if

the warning

stops.

But then,

if

you

still have the

warning,

turn

c$ftthe

engine

and

get

everyone

out

of

the

a,chicke

until

it

cools

down.

You may

decide not to

lift

the

hood

but

to

get service

help

right

away.

When

you

decide

it’s

safe

to

lift

the

hood,

here’s what

you’ll

see:

A.

Radiator Pressure

Cap

B.

Electric Engine

Fans

C.

Coolant

Recovery

Tank

If

there

seem

to

be

no

leak,

with

the

engine

on,

check

io

see

if

the

electric

engiap,e

cooling

fans

are

mnning.

If

the

engine

is

cverkeating,

both

fm.s

shouici

be

marning.

If

they

aren't,

your

vehicle

needs

service.

CAUTION:

Adding

only

plain water to

your

cooling system

can be dangerous. Plain water,

OF

some other

liquid like alcohol,

can

boil before the proper

coolant mixture will.

Your

vehicle’s coolant

warning system

is

set

for

the proper coolant

mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,

your

engine could get too hot but

you

wouldn’t

get the overheat warning. Your engine could

catch fire and you or others could

be

burned.

Use

a

50/50

mixture of clean water

and

DEX-COOL@

coolant.

___~

__~

~~

___

__

In

cold weather, water can freeze and crack

the

engine, radiator, heater

core

and

other

parts.

Use the recommended

cooisant

and

the

proper

coolant mixture.

7m:;

.....................

~

,...

,

.,., . .

.,.,.

..........

....

1.

You

can remove

the

radiator

pressure

cap

when

the cooling system,

including

the

radiator

pressure

cap

and

upper radiator

hose,

is longer

hot.

Turn

the

pressure

cap

S~OW~Y

counterdockwise

until

it

fist

stops.

(Don't

press

down

while

turning

the

pressure

cap)

If

you

hez

a

hiss,

wait

for

ahat

to

stop.

A hiss

means

there

is

still

some

presswe

lek.

/.:.:..;

.....

..........

.:.:.....:

......

T%%%Y.

..............

,I

.............

w....

....

.......

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Start

the

engine

and

let

it

mn

until

you

can

feel

the

upper radiator hose

getting

h~t.

Watch

QU~

fop

the

engine

cooling

fans.

By

this

time,

the

coolant level inside

the

radiator

filler neck may

be

lower.

If

the

level

is

lower,

add

more

of

he

proper

DEX-COOP

coolant

mixture

ahrough

the

filler

neck

until

the

level reaches the

base

of

the

filler neck.

0:.

.. . .

If

8

Goes

FE&

It’s unusual for

a

tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,

especially

if

you

maintain

your tires properly.

If

air

goes

i...

...

out

of a

&e,

it’s

much moie likely to leak out slowly.

But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are

a

few

tips about what to expect

and

what to

do:

1

‘i

<

1

If

a front tire fails, the flat

tire

will create

a

drag that

’,

!!

pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take

YOLK

foot

off

the

g

accelerator pedal and

grip

the steering wheel firmly.

P

Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake

to

-4

,i

a stop well out

of

the

traffic lane.

.2?

.<J

A

rear blowout, particularly on a cwe, acts much like a

skid

and may require the same correction you’d use in a

8.

Then replace the pressure cap.

At

any

time during

this procedure if

CQQ~EUI~

begins

to

flow

out of the

filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the

mows

on

the pressure cap line

up

like this.

s~.

h

any kearblowout, remove your foot

kom

the

accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by

steering the

way

you want the vehicle to go. It may be

very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently

brake to

a

stop

--

well

off

the

road

if possible.

If

a

tire

goes

flat,

the

shows how

to

use

your

jacking equipment to change a flat

tire

safely.

,

................................................................................

..................................................................................

L

................................................................................

,

...........................................

,.

.........................................

3.

................

...........................................

............................................

...................

.....................

.:

.....

:.:.y,>:.:

......

,

................

$;z<?*:M

..........

._.

.

....

..............................

.........

Z,...?...

.....

.~.~.:.1.~.~,~~::~~.;.:.:

................

....

?:.a

~~.:.~.:~:~~$

...........

The following steps are necessary if you have the

dloy

(alu~num)

wheel with a center cover that conceals the

wheel nuts.

1.

Insert the flat end of the wheel wrench

in

the

notch and pry

off

the center cover.

DQ

not

drop

the cover

QP

lay it face down, as it could be scratched

or damaged.

2.

If

your

vehicle

has

this

aluhum wheel, you

may have plastic wheel

nut caps. Use

the

wheel

nut wrench to remove

the wheel nut caps

anad

to

loosen

the

wheel

nuts.

3.

When reinstalling the decorative nut caps, tighten the

caps snugly with

the

wheel wrench, then continue

one-eighth

of

a

turn

for steel caps

and

one-quarter

of

a

turn

€or plastic caps.

It is not required

to

remove

the

center cover on

this

wheel; however,

i€

it

should

be

necessary,

it

should

be removed

hm

the back side by pushing out with

a

blunt tool and not pried

off

from the front.

When reinstalling the cap, there

is

a

plastic

alignment pin which must be aligned with the notch

in the wheel to assure proper installation.

4.

After

the

wheel

is

put back on the vehicle, replace

the cover. Apply pressure around

the

edge of the

cover

to

snap

it

in place.

Do

not use a hammer or

mallet to instdl the cover.

I.

Use

the

wheel

wrench

to

loosen the wheel

nuts,

but

don’t.

remove

them

yet.

2.

The

jack

has

a

bolt

at

the

end.

Attach

the

wheel

wrench

to

the bolt

to

create

a

jack

handle.

3.

Rotate the

wheel

wrench

to

the

left

to

lower the

jack

head

until

it

fits under the vehicle.

11 INCHES

I

(28 CM)

1

4.

Near

each

wheel

well

is

a

KIO~C~

in the plastic

trim

panel

to

position

the

jack

head.

You’ll

find

the

word

JACK

and

an

amow

stamped

into

the plastic near

each

notch.

Position

the

jack

under the vehicle and

raise the

jack

head

until it fits

firmly

against the

sheet metal

the

word

JACK.

Do

not raise the

vehicle yet. Put

the

compact spare tire

near

you.

.

..

.

Raising

your

vehicle with

the

jack

improperly

positioned can damage the vehicle and even

make

the

vehicle

fall.

To

help

avoid

personal

injury

and

vehicle

damage, be

sure

to

fit

the

jack

lift head

into

the proper lo~ation before raising

the

vehicle.

.

..

1..

...

....

-..:::q

,

.

...

,

.

,

._..

:

,..

..

.

..

5.

Raise

the vehicle

by

rotating the wheel wrench

to

the

right

in

the

jack.

Raise

the.vehicle

far

enough

off

the

ground

so

there

is

enough

room

for

the

spare

tire

to

fit.

6.

Remove

all

she wheel

nuts

and

take

off

the

flat

tire.

7.

Remove

my

rust

or

Girt

from

the wheel

bolts,

aoundng

surfaces

and

spare wheel.

CAUTION:

Rust or

dirt

on

the

wheel,

OB"

on

the

parts

to

which

it

is

fastened, can make the wheel nuts

become

Boose

dter

a

time. The wheel could come

off

and

cause an accident. When

YOU

change

a

wheel,

remove

any

rust

or

dirt

from

the

places

where the wheel attaches to

the

vehicle.

In

an

emergency,

you

can

use

a

cloth

or

a

paper dowel

to

do

this;

but

be

sure

to

use

a

scraper

or

wire

brush

later,

if

you

need

to,

to

get all

the

rust

or

dirt

off.

Never

use

oil

or

grease

on

studs

OF

nubs.

If

yon

do,

the nuts

might

come

EOQS~.

YQUF

wheeI

could

fajI

off,

causing

a

serious

accident.

9.

Lower

the

vehicle

by

rotating

the wheel

wrench to

the

left.

Lower

the

jack

completely.

10.

Using

the wheel

wrench,

tighten the

wheel

nuts

fdy

in

a

Incorrect

wheel

nuts

or

improperly tightened

wheel nuts

can

cause the wheel to become

~cocpse

and even come

off.

This

could

lead

to

an

accident.

Be

sure

to use the correct wheel nuts.

If

you have

to

replace them, be

sure

to get

new

GM

original

equipment wheel nuts.

Stop somewhere

as

soon

as

you

can

and have the

nuts

tightened with

a

torque wrench to

PO0

lb-ft

(140

Nem).

7

iR

SPARE TIRE

COVER

A

\.

The

compact

spue

tire

is

for

temporaw

use

only.

Replace

the

compact

spare

tire

with

a

?dl-size

tire

as

soon

as

you

can.

See

"Compact

Spare

Tire"

later

in

this

section.

‘Fire

chains

won’t

fit

your compact

spare.

Using

them

caw

damage

your

vehicle

and

can

damage

the

chains

too.

Don’t

use

tire

chains

on

your

eomp?act

spare.

j

NOTICE:

Spinning

your

wheeEs

can

destroy

parts

sf

your

vehicle

as

well

as

the

tires.

If

YOU

spin

the

wheels

&OO

fast

while shifting

your

transaxle

back

and

forth,

you

can

destroy

your

tramaxle.

~ ~ ~~~~

FOP

information

about

using

tire

chains

on

ycur

vehicle,

see “Tire

Chains”

in the

Index.

6-2

6-

3

4-9

6-12

4-17

6-

19

4-20

6-23

5-27

6-28

6-29

4-32

6-33

6-45

6-46

Service

Fuel

Checking

Things

Under

the

Hood

Engine

Oil

Air Cleaner

Supercharger

Oil

Automatic

Transaxle

Fluid

Engine

Coolant

Radiator Bressure

Cap

VVindskieTd

Washes

Fluid

Br&es

3

attery

Bulb

Replacement

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Tires

Appearance

Care

Cleaning

the

Inside

QE

Y(.w

VehicEe

Cleaning the

Outside

of

Your

Vehicle

Underbody Maintenance

Chemical

Paint

Spotting

Appearance

Care

Materials

Chart

Vehicle icientifkation

Number

(VIN)

Electrical

System

Removing

the

Rear Seat Cushion

Replacement

Bulbs

Capacities

and

Specifications

Air

Conditioning Re€rigerants

Engine Specifications

Vehicle Dimensions

Normal

Maintenance Replacement

'Parts

Your dealer knows

your

vehicle best and wants

you

to

be

happy

with it. We hope

you’II

go

to

your

dealer

€or

all your service needs. You’ll get genuine

GM

parts

and

GM-trained

and

supported service people.

We hope

you’ll want to keep

your

GM

vehicle all

GM.

Genuine

GM

parts have

one

of

these

marks:

Genuine

Your

vehicle

has

an

air bag

system.

Before attempting

to

do your own service

work,

see

“Servicing Your

Air

Bag-Equipped Vehicle”

in

the Index.

You

should

keep

a

record with

a111

parts

receipts and list

the mileage and the date

of

any

service

work

you

perform. See “Maintenance Record”

in

the Index.

Things you might add to the outside

of

your vehicle can

affect

the

airdaow around it.

This

may cause wind noise

and affect windshield washer performance. Check with

your dealer before adding equipment to the outside

of

your vehicle.

The

8th

digit

sf

your vehicle identification number

(Vm)

shows the code

lettee

for your

engine.

You

will

find

the

VIN

at

the

top

left

of

your

instmment

panel.

(See “Vehicle

Identifkation

Number’’

in the Endex.)

If

you

have

the

3800

engine

(VIN

Code

use

regula

unleaded gasoline rated

at

87

octane or higher.

If

you’re

using fuel rated

at

the recommended octane or higher

and

you

hear heavy knocking, your engine needs

service. But don’t

worry

if

YOU

hear

a little pinging

noise when you’re accelerating or driving

up

a hill.

That’s

normal,

and

YOU

don’t have to

buy

a

higher

octane fuel

to

get

rid

of

pinging.

It’s

the

heavy, constant

knock

that

means you have

a

problem.

If

you have the

3800

Supercharged engine

(VHN

Code

I),

use

premium unleaded gasoline rated

at

91

octane or higher.

With

the

3800

Supercharged

engine, in

an

emergency,

you

may be

able

to

use

a

lower

QC~XE

--

as low as

87

--

if

heavy knocking

does

not occur.

If

you

are using

91

cx

higher octane unleaded

gasoline and

YOU

hear heavy knocking,

your

engine

needs service.

6-3

!F

your

vehicle

Is

certified

to

meet California

Emission

Sbmdirrds

(indicated the

underhood

emission control

idxl),

it

is

designed

to

ogerate

on

heEs that

meet

C”a1Efornia

specificztions.

If

such fuels

are

not

available

states

adopting

California

e:raissions

standads,

your

i~hicfe

will

operate satisfactorily

on

fuels meeting

fktPeral

specifications,

but

emission control

system

;?crt’om.srmmce

may

be afiected. The maTfunctian indicator

Fmrp

OR

your instrument panel

may

turn

on

and/or

your

v&kk

may

fail

a

smog-check test.

If

this

occurs, return

to

ywr

nlrtEnorlzed

Buick

dealer

Ear

diagnosis

to

To

provide

ckaner

air,

a11

gasdines

in

the

United

States

are

now

required

to

c~ntain

~ddifves

that

will

help

?revent

deposits

from

forming in

you erz.gine and

fuel

system,

allowing

your

emission control system to

function properly. Therefore,

you

shdd

sot

have

to

add

anything

to

the fuel,.

In

addition,

gasdines containir,g

oxygenates,

such

as

ethers

and

ethanol,

and

reformulated gasolines

may

be

available in

your

area

to

help clean the

air.

General

Motors

recommends

that

you

use

these gasolines

if

they comply

with

the

specifications described

edier.

Fuels

iB

Foreign

c@n&+@s

If

yon

plan

on

driving

in

another country outside the

United States

or

Canada, the proper fuel may be

hard

to

find. Never

ease

Headed gasoline

or

any

other

fuel

not

recommended

in

the

previous text on &el. Costly repairs

caused

by

use

of

improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by

your

wappanty.

To

check

on

fuel availability,

ask

ann

auto club,

or

contact

a

major

oil

company

that

does

business

in

the

country

where you’ll

be

driving.

You

can

also

write us

at

the

following address

for

advice. Just tell

us

where you’re going

ad

give your

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

General Motors Overseas Distribution

Corporation

1908

Colonel

Sam

Drive

Oshawa,

Ontario

LIH

8P7

The cap is

behind

a

hinged

door

on

the driver’s

side

of

your

vehicle.

When

you put the cap

back

on,

turn

it

to

the

right

until

you hear

a

clicking

sound.

Make sure you

fully

install

the

cap.

The

diagnostic

system

can

determine if the fuel

cap

has

been

left

off

or improperly installed.

This

would

allow

fuel

to

evaporate into the atmosphere. See

“Malhnctiom Indicator

Lap”

in

the

Index.

NOTICE:

If

you need

a

new cap,

be

sum

to

get

the

right

type. Your dealer

can

get one

for

you.

If

YQU

get

the

wrong

type,

it

may

not

$it

properly.

This

may

cause

youp:

malfunction

indicator lamp to

light

and

YOU^

fuel

tank

and

emissions system may be

damaged.

see

“Malfunction

hdicatos

Earnp’’

in

the Index.

Things

that bum can get

on

hot

engine

parts

and

start

a

fire.

These

include

liquids

like gasoline,

oil,

coolant, brake

fluid,

windshield washer

and

other

fluids,

and

plastic

~r

rubber.

YQU

OF

others

could

be

burned. Be careful not to drop or

spill

things

that

will

bum onto

a

hot engine.

A.

Battery

B.

Radiator Pressure

Cap

C.

Engine Oil

Dipstick

D.

Engine

Oil

Fill

Cap

@.

Wmcishield Wisher

Fluid

Reservoir

H.

Engine

Cdmt

Recovery Tank

I.

Air

Cleaner

Your

vehicle may have

2

3800

Sqercharged engine.

Supercharging, rather

than

turbocharging,

emphasizes

smooth,

refined power.

The

supercharger

is

a device which

is

designed

to

pump

more

ais

into the engine than

it

would

normally

use.

This

air

mixed

with fuel creates increased engine power.

Since the supercharger

is

a

pump

and

is

driven

from

an

engine

accessory

drive belt, iwreased pressure

is

available

at

all

driving

conditions.

The

Powertrain

Control Module

(PCM)

works

with

a

vacuum control

to

regulate

the

increased pressure

required

during

specific driving

conditions.

When

this

increased pressure

or

boost

is

not

desired, such

as

during

idling

and

light

tfarsttIe cruising, the excess air

that

the

supercharger

is

pumping

is

routed through

a

bypass.

AB1

sf

these

controk

working

together provide

high

performance character

and

fuel

efficiency

in

the

3800

V6

Supercharged

engine.

The power steering

pump

and

reservoir

are

mounted

on

the rear

(driver’s

side)

sf

the engine biock. See

“Maintenance Schedule”

in

the

Index

for

when

you

should

check the fluid.

c

ENGINE

OIL

LOW

CHECK

LEVEL

HMBHBMrn

Ef

you

have the Driver

Infcmation

Center,

an

ENGINE

OIL LOW-CHECK

LEVEL

message

will

appear

when

the

engine

oil

is

approximately

I

quart

(fL)

Isw.

11

the

message

is

displayed,

check

the

dipstick

level

and

add

oil

as

needed.

7r

Oils

recommended

for

your

vehicle

can

be

identified

by looking

for

the

'"Starburst"

symbol.

Vas

symbol

indicates

that

the

0iI

has

been certified

by

the American

Petroleum Institute (AH).

Do

not

use

any

oil

whch

does

not

cmy

this

Starburst

symbd.

P

oil

dipstick.

Be

sure

to

fill

it

enough

tc

put

the Bevel somewhere

in

the

proper

operating

range.

Push

the

dipstick

all

the

way

back

in

when you're

through.

If

you

change

your

own

oil,

be sure

you

use

oil

that

has

the

Starburst

symbol

on

the

front

of

the

oil

container.

If

you

have

your

oil

changed

for

you,

be

sure

the

02

put

into your engine

is

American

Petroleum

Institute

certified

f~r

gasoline

engines.

You

should

also

use

the

prcper

viscosity

oil

for

your

vehicle,

as

shown

in

the

following

chart:

I

-+38

;

+27

If

none

of

them is

true,

use

the

%ong

triphighway

maintenance schedule. Change the

oil

and filter every

7,500

miles

(12

500

km)

or

12

months

--

whichever

occurs

ht.

Driving a vehicle with

a

fully warmed

engine

under

highway conditions causes engine

oil

to

$re&

down

dower.

If

any one

of

these

is

true

for

you,

use

the

short

tripkity

maintenance schedule:

8

Most

trips

are

less

than

5

to

13

miles

(8

to

I

6

km).

This

is

particularly

important when outside

temperatures

are

below freezing.

Most

trips include extensive id1ir.g

(such

as frequent

$riving

in

stop-and-go traffic).

Most

trips

are though dusty areas.

You

frequently

tow

a

trailer

or

use

a

carrier

on

top

of

your vehicle.

The

vehicle

is

used

for

delivery service, police, taxi

or other

commercial

application.

Driving under these conditions causes engine

oil

to

break down

sooner.

Hf

any me

of

these is true

for

your

vehicle, then

YOU

need

to

change your si1

and

filter

every

3,000

miles

(5

000

km)

or

3

months

--

whichever

occurs

kt.

(See

Engine

Oil Life Monitor (Index) in

the Index.

1

Did you

know

that used engine oil contains certain

ekmer,ts that may

be

unhealthy

for

your

skin

and

csdd

even cause cancer? Don’t

let

used

oil

stay

on

your

skin

for

very iong.

Clean

your

skin

and

nails

with

soap

and

water, or a good

hznd

cleaner.

Wash

or

properly

throw

away clothing

or

rags

containing

used

engine

oil.

(See

the manufacturer’s warnings about

the

use

and

disposal

of

oil

products.)

Used

oil

can

be

a

real t-heat

to

the environment.

If

you

change

your

own oil, be sure

to

drain all free-flowing

oil

from

the filter before disposal.

Don’t

ever dispose

of

oil

by putting

it

in

the

trash, pouring

it

on

the

ground,

into

sewers,

or

into streams

or

bodies

of

water. Instead,

recycle it by taking it

to

a place that coilects used oil.

If

you

have

a

problem properly disposing

of

your used oil,

ask your dealer,

a

service station

or

a

local recycling

center for kelp.

I

Remove

the

wing

nuts

on

the

air

cleaner

housing

cover.

...

..

2.

Remove the

air

intake

hose

that

snaps

over the

bottle

body

by

pulling

the

hose upward

and

away

from

the throttle

body. As

YOU

are detaching

the

hose, remove

ahe

air

cleaner

housing

cover

by

pulling

upward

and

remarc%.

3.

Replace

the

air

filter.

4.

Reattach the

air

intake

hose.

5.

Reinstall

the

air

cleaner housing cover.

Refer

to

the Maintenance Schedule

to

determine when to

replace the

air

filter.

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”

in

the

Index.

Operating the engine

with

the

air

cleaner

off

can

cause

you

or others

to

be burned.

The

air

eleaner

not

only

cleans

the

air,

it

stops flame

if

the engine

backfires.

1%

it

isn’t

there,

and

the

engine

backfires,

you

could

be

burned.

Don’t

drive

with

it

off,

and

be careful

working

on

%he

engine

with

the

air

cleaner

off.

If

the

air cleaner

is

off,

a

backfire can

cause

a

damaging engine

fire.

And,

dirt

cars

easily

get

into

your

engine,

which

will

damage

it.

Always

have

the

air

cleaner

in

place

when

you’re

driving.

Check

oil

only when the engine

is

cold.

Allow the

engine

to

cool

two

to three hours after running.

I.

Clean

tke

area

around

the

oil fill

plug

before

removing

it.

2.

Remove the

G~H

fill

plug

wing

a

3/26

inch

Allen

wrench.

3.

The

oil

level

is

correct when

it

just reaches

efre

bottom

of

the

threads

of

the

inspection hole.

4.

Replace the

oil

plug with

the

O-ring

in

place.

Torque

to

88

bin

(

IO

N-m).

A

good

time

to check

your

automatic transaxle

fluid

level

is

wherr the engine

oil

is

changed.

Change

both

the

fluid

a.nd

filter

every

50,000 miles

(83

080

Ian)

if

the

vehicle

is

mainly

driven

rander

one

or

more

of

these

conditions:

8

In

heavy

city

traffic

where the outside temperature

regularly reaches

90°F

(32°C)

or

higher.

0

Uses

such

as

found

in

taxi,

police

QT

delivery

service.

If

you

do

not

use

your

vehicle

under

any

sf

these

conditions,

the

fluid

and filter

do

not

reqwie

changing.

See

“Scheduled

Maintenance Services”

in

the

Index.

Because

this

operation

can

be

a

little

difficult,

you

may

choose

to

have

this

done

set

your

3uick

dealerslug

Service Department.

If

you

do

it

yourself,

be

sue

to follow all the

instructions

here,

OT

you

could

get

a

false

reading

on

the

dipstick.

Wait

at

Beast

30

minutes

before

checking

the

transaxle

fhid

lwei

if

you

have been driving:

8

When

outsiOe temperatures are

above

90°F

(3~

e>.

m0-

@

At

high

speed for

quite

a

while.

e

In

heavy

traffic

--

especiaily

in

hot

weather.

8

While

gulling

a trailer.

Then, without

shutting

off

the engine, follow these

steps:

1.

The

transaxle

fluid

dipstick

top

is

a

round,

red

loop

and

is

.............

the

brake master

cylinder behind

the

engine block.

Pull

out

the dipstick

and

wipe

it

with

a

clean rag

or

paper towel.

3.

Check

both

sides

of

the dipstick, and read the

lower level. The fluid 'level

must

be in the

cross-hatched area.

2.

Push

it back

in

all

the

way,

wait

thee seconds and

4.

If

the fluid level

is

in

the acceptable range,

push

then pull it back

out

again.

the dipstick back in

a11

the

way.

Refer

to

the Maintenance Schedule

to

determine what

kind

of

transaxle fluid to use.

See

“Recommended

Fluids

md

Eubricmts”

in

the

Index.

If

the fluid level is low, add only enough

of

the proper

fluid

to

bring the level into

the

cross-hatched area

on

the dipstick.

I.

Pull

out the dipstick.

2.

Using

a

long-neck funnel,

add

enough

fluid

at

the

dipstick hole

to

bring it

to

the

proper level.

It doesn’t

take

much fluid, generally less

than

one

pint

(0.5

L).

Don’t

ove@Zl.

3.

After adding

fluid,

recheck the fluid level

ips

4.

When

the

correct fluid level is

obt.ained,

push

the

described under “How to Check.”

dipstick back in

dl

the

way.

The

cooling

s

stem in

your

vehicle

is

filled

with

DEX-COOL

engine

coolant.

This

coolant

is

designed

to

remain

in

your

vehicle for

5

years

or

150,000

miles

(240

MI0

h)

whichever

occurs

first,

if

you

add

only

DEX-COOL“

extended

life

coolant,

The following explains

your

coding system and

how

to

add coolant when

it

is

low.

If

YOU

have

a

problem

with

engine

overheating,

see

“Engine

Overheating”

in

the

Index.

A

50/50

mixture

of

water

and

DEX-COOL’

coolant will:

J

Give freezing protection down to

-34°F

(-37°C).

Give boiling protection

up

to

265

OF

129

”

C).

Protect against rust and corrosion.

Help keep the proper engine temperature.

Let

the

warning lights and gages

work

as

they should.

NOTICE:

When adding coolant,

it

is

importrant that you use

O~Y

DEX-CQOE~

(sficate-free)

COQI~~.

If

coolant other than

DEX-COOL

is

added to the

system, premature engine, heater

core

or

radiator corrosion may result.

Hw

addition, the

engine coolant

will

require change

SQB~~F

--

at

30,000

des

(50

000

b)

or

24

months,

whichever occurs

first.

Damage caused by the

use

of

coolant other than

DEX-COOL@

is

not

c~vemdl by

your

new

vehicle warranty.

Use a mixture

of

one-half

clean

water

(preferably

distilled)

and

one-half

DEX-COOL’

coolant

which

won’t

damage aluminum

pats.

If

you

use

this

mixture,

YOU

don’t need

to

add anything else.

..

Adding

only

plain water to

your

cooling system

can be dangerous. Blain water, or some other

liquid like alcohol,

can

boil before the proper

coolant mixture

will.

Your vehicle’s

CQO~~

warning system

is

set for

the

proper c~~lmt

mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,

your engine could get too

hot

but

you

wouldn’t

get the overheat warning. Your engine could

catch fire and

yon

or others

could

be burned.

Use

a

50/50

mixture

of

clean water

and

DEX-CBOL@

codant.

6-24

The

csdant

recovery

tank

is

located

QII

the

@river's

side

of the

engine

compartment.

1

f

ENG.

COOLANT

LOW

CHECK LEVEL

Turning

the

radiator

pressure

cap

when

the

engine and radiator

are

hot

can allow

steam

and

scalding liquids

to

blow

out

and

burn

yon

badly.

With the codant

recovery

tank,

you

will

almost

never

have

fO

add

coolant

at

the

radiator.

Never

turn

the radiator

pressure

cap

--

even

a

little

--

when

the

engine

sand

radiator

are

hot.

You

can

be

burned if

you

spill

cooiant

QPB

hot

engine

parts. Coolant contains ethylene

glycol,

and

it

will

burn

if

the engine

parts

are

hot

enough.

Don't

spill coolant

on

a

hot engine.

prevent coolant loss

and

possible engine damage

~

filler neck.

When you replace

your

radiator pressure cap,

an

AC~

.t

;trolled

by

a themosta

in

<he engine coolak system. The thennostat

stops

the

flow

of

coolant through the radiator

until

the coolant

reaches

a

preset temperature.

When you replace your themostat,

an

AC@

themostat

is

recommended.

When the engine compartment

is

cool, wipe the cap and

the top

of

the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap

and

wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the

cap

and

completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and

Book

at the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should

be

at

the

FTLL

COLD

mark.

If

necessary, add

Q~Y

enough fluid to

bring

the level up

to

the

mark.

at

to

use

To

determine what kind

of

fluid to use, see

“Recommended Fluids

and

Lubricants”

in

the Index.

Always use the proper fluid. Failure

to

use the proper

fluid

can

cause leaks

and

damage hoses

and

seals.

What

to

use

When you need windshield washer fluid,

be

sure

to

read

the manufacturer’s instructions before use.

If

you

will be

operating

your

vehicle

in

an

area where the temperature

may

fall

below keezing, use a fluid

that

has suffkient

protection against freezing.

The

windshield washer fluid reservoir

is

located

by

the

coolant recovery

tank

on

the

driver’s side

of

the

engine compartment.

Open

the

cap labeled

WASHER

ONLX

Add

washer

fluid

until the tank

is

full.

Your

brake master cylinder reservoir

is

here.

It

is

filled

with

DOT-3

brake fluid.

There

are

only

two

reasom

why

the

brake

fluid

level

in

the

reservob might

go

down.

The

first

is

that

the brake

fluid

goes

~QW

to

an

acceptable Bevel during

nd

brake

Wg

wear. When new linings are put

in,

the

fluid

level

goes

back

up.

The

other reason

is

that

fluid

is

Bedung

out

of

the

brake

system. If

it

is,

you

~h~~ld

have

YQW

brake

system

fixed,

since

a

leak means

that

sooner or

later

YQIX

brakes won't work

wd,

or

won't work

at

all.

So,

it

isn‘t

a

good

idea

to

“top

oft“

your

brake

fluid.

Adding

brake

fluid

won’t correct

a

leak.

If

YOU

add

fluid

when

your

linings

are

worn, then you’ll

have

loo

much

fluid

when

you

get new

brake

linings.

You

shouki

add

(or

remove)

brake

fluid,

as

necessary, only

when

work

is

done

on

the

brake

hydraulic system.

When

your Srake

fluid

falls

to

a

low

level,

your

brake

warning

light

will come

on.

A

chime

will

sound

if

you

try

to

drive

with

this

warning

light

on.

See

“Brake

System

Waning

Eight”

in the

Index.

When

you

do

need

brake

fluid,

use

only

DOT-3

brAe

fluid

--

such

as Delco

Supreme

II@

(GM

Part

No.

12377967).

Use new brake

fluid

from

a

sealed container

only.

Always

clean the brake

fluid

reservoir cap

and

the

mea

around

the cap before removing

it. This

will

help

keep

dirt

from

entering the reservoir.

~~ ~~

With the

wrong

kind

of

fluid in

your

brake

system,

your

brakes

may

not

work

well,

or

they

may

not

even

work

at

all.

This

could

cause

a

I

1

crash.

Always use

the

proper

brake

fluid.

1

NOTICE:

Using the

wrong

fluid

can badly damage

brake system

parts.

For

example, just

a

few

drops

of

minerallbased oil,

such

as

engine

oil,

in

your

brake

system

can damage brake

system

parts

so

badly that they’ll have

to

be

replaced.

Don’t

let someone gut in

the

If

you

spill brake fluid

OEI

your

vehicle’s

painted

surfaces,

the paint

finish

can

be

damaged. Be careful

not

to

spill brake

fluid

on

your vehicle.

If

you do, wash it

off

immediately. See “Appearance Case”

in

the Index.

wrong

kind

of

fluid.

Your

vehicle

has

four-wheel

disc

brakes.

Disc brake

pads

have

built-in

wear

inchcators

&at

make

a

high-pitched

warning

sound

when

the

brake

pads

are

worn

and

new

pads

are needed.

The

sound

may

come

and

go

or

be

heard

all

the

time

your

vehicle

is

moving

(except

when

you

are

pushing

on the brake

pedal

firmly).

The brake wear warning

sound

means

that

soon

your brakes won’t work well. That could

lead

to

an

accident. When you hear the

brake

wear

warning

sound,

have your vehicle

serviced.

NOTICE:

Continuing

to

drive with worn-out brake

pads

could result in costly brake repair.

Some

driving conditions

or

climates

may

cause

a

brake

squeal

when

the brakes are

first

applied

or

lightly

applied.

This

does

not mean something

is

wrong

with

your brakes.

Properiy

torqued

whee! nuts

irre

necessary

to

heIp

prevent

brake

pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect

brake

pacts

for

wear

and

evenly

torque

wheel

nuts

in

the

proper

sequence

to

GM

specifications.

Brake

linings

should

always

be

replaced

2s

complete

axle

seis.

See

"Brake

System Inspectioc"

in

Section

7

of

this

nanuai

under

Part

C

"Periodic Maintecance

Inspections."

Every time

you

apply

the

brakes,

with

or

wiFhcut

the

vehicle

moving,

your

brakes

adjust

for

wear.

Tie

braking

system

a

modem

vehicle

is

complex.

Its

many

parts

have

to

be

of

top

quality

and

work

weII

together

if

the

vehicle

is

io

lxwe

reakly

good

braking.

Your

vehicle

\vas

designed

and

tested with top-quality

GM

brake

puts.

When

you

replace

parts

of

your

braking

system

--

for

example,

when

your

brake

kings

wear

down

and

you

have

to

Rave new ones

put

irn

--

be

sure

you

get new approved

GM

replacement parts.

If

YOQ

don't,

your

brakes

may

no

ionger

work

properly. For

example,

if

someone

puts

in

brake

linings

that

are

wrong

for

your

vehicle, the

balance

between your

front

and

rex brzkes

can

change

--

for

the

worse.

The

braking

performance

you've

come

to

expect cm change

in

many

other ways

if

someone

~dts

in

the wrong replacement

brake

parts.

Every

new Buick

has

an

ACIMCQ

~reedcm~

battery.

You

never have

to

add water

to

one

of

these. Wen

it's

time

for

a

new battery, we recommend

m

ACDelco

Freedom battery. Get one

that

has

the replacement

mrnber

shown

cn

the

original

battery's label.

If

you're

not

going

to

drive

your

vehicle

for

25

days

or

mcre, remove the black, negative

(-)

cable

from

the

battery.

This

will

help

keep

your

battery

from

running

down.

Bse$tesies have acid that can

burn

you

and gas

that

can

explode.

You

ran be badly hurt

if

JW.I

aren't careful. See

"Jump

Starting"

in

the Index

for

tips

on

working

around

a battery without

getting

hurt.

Contact

yoirr

dealer

to

Iem

how

to

prepzre

your

vehicle

for

longer

storage

periods.

Also,

for

your

audio

system,

see

'Theft-Deterrent

Feature"

in

the

Index.

Halogen bulbs have pressurized

g;as

inside

and

can burst if

YOU

drop

or

scratch

the

bulb.

You

or

others

could

be

injured. Be

sure

to

read

and

follow the instructions

on

the

btrbb

package.

Each headlamp

is

amached

by

thumb

screws.

...........

..........

...........

..

......a

,

..

....

q::z;*:<i:,

:....-.

...

....

.....

...

....

............

.......

...

,

..

,

....

.....

..

1.

Remove

the

thumb

screws

by

turning

them

to

the

left.

2.

Pull

the

headlamp

away

from

the

car.

3.

Remove

the

bulb

socket

by

turning

it

onequarter

of

a

tuna

to

the

left,

while pressing it

firmly,

then

pull

it

out.

Note:

YQU

can

use

pliers

to

remove

the

bulb

socket

if

you

are

unable

to

do

Et

by

hand.

..

I

'.

..

4.

Remove the wire connector

from the

bulb

by

lifting

the

EQC~

tab

ad

pulling

it

away

from

the

plastic

base.

5.

Reverse the above steeps

to

reassemble

ahe

Bamp

assembly.

The

fiont

turn

signal

bulbs

can

be

accessed

by

removing the

headlamp

assembly

as

described in

the previous procedure.

Once

the

headlamp

assembly

has

been removed,

reach

down

from

the

top

of

the

vehicle

and,

while

pressing the

lock

tab

on

the

socket,

turn

the socket

onequarter

of

a

turn

and

pull

it out.

When reassembling the lamp, make sure

to

align

the

at the outboapd edge

of

the

headlamp

assembly to

the

plastic retainer at the outboard

edge

of

the vehicle.

Remove the

old

bulb by pulling it straight out

of

the

socket. Replace the bulb

md

turn

the bulb assembly

back into place.

ff

ysbts

vehicle

is

damaged

in

m

accident and the

headamp

ain

seems

to

be

affected, see

your

dealer.

Headlamps

sn

damaged vehicles

may

require

recttiibration

of

the

horizontal

aim

by

your

dealer.

To

check

the

ala,

<he vekick

should

be

p-~pdg’

prepared

2s

follows:

The vehicle

should

aot

have

any

snow,

ice

OK-

aud

attache6

to

it.

o

There

sh~dd

not

be

any

CS~Q

or loading

of

the

vehicle, except

it

should

have

2

full

tank

of

gas

and

me

person or

160

Ibs.

(75

kg)

on

the

driver’s

seat.

@

Tires

should be

properly

inflated.

Rock

the

vehicle

to

stabilize

the

suspension.

For the vertical. adjustment, state inspection stations

generally wiJl

allow

a reading

of

plus

0.76

degrees

or

minus

0.76

degrees from the center

of

the bubble.

......

It

is

recommended that the

upper

limit

not exceed

plus

0.4

degrees

from

the center

of

the bubble. Other

drivers

may

flash

their

high beans at you

if

your

adjustment is

much

above

plus

0.4

degrees.

The headlamp

aiming

device

is

under

the

hood, directly

behind the headlamps.

If

you

find that the headlamp aiming needs adjustment,

follow these steps:

Stat

with the vertical headlamp

aim.

Adjustment

screws can be tanned with

an

E8

Torn@

socket or

TI5

Tom

screwdriver.

1.

Check the vertical

aim

for

each headlamp

(A).

The

vehicle must

be

on

a Bevel surface.

Turn

the

vertical

aiming screw

(B)

until

the bubble in the level is lined

up with the

0

(zero).

For

the

type

of

buib

to

use,

see "Replacement

Bulbs"

in

the

Index.

2.

Unhook

the

cargo

net

from

the

cargo

net

retainer

and

remove

the

retainer

by

turning

it

tc

the

left.

3.

Pull

back

the

trunk

trim

panel.

4.

Beneath the

trim

panel are three

nuts

that

secure the

taillamp assembly. Remove these nuts with

a

BO

mm

wrench. Remove the nuts

from

only

the

side you

want

to

access. The

turn

signal

and

a

stoplamp

can

now be accessed.

5.

Pull the

t~illmp

assembly

away

from

the vehicle.

6.

Remove

the

bulb

socket

assembly by turning

the

socket one-quarter

of

a

tun

to

the

lek

and

7.

Once the socket has

been removed,

pull

the

bulb

straight

out

to remove

it

from

the socket.

8.

Reverse the above steps

to

replace the

taiUamp assembly.

Turn

lamps,

stoplamps

and

back-up

bulbs

are located

bekind

the

taillamp

assembly

along

the

trunk

lid.

The

following

instructions

explain

how

to

access these bulbs.

1.

There

are

four

studs

located at the edge

of

the

trunk

lid.

Remove the

protective

vinyl

caps

from

the

studs.

3.

Next, there are eight fasteners along

the

top

of

tame

trunk

lid

(four

on

each

side),

holding the

trunk

trim

in

place.

Remove

these

fasteners.

6-42

.

..

4.

Hold

the

treEnk

trim

back

to

expose

the

three

mnaining

nuts

holding

the

taillamp

assembly

in

place.

5.

From

inside

the

tmnk

compment,

use

a

10

mppl

wrench

to

remove the

nuts

from

the

studs.

IC.,.

.

-

-.-

.

9.

Reverse

the

above steps

taillamp

assembly.

7.

8.

Once

the

socket

has

been removed, pull

the

bulb straight

out

to

remove

it

from

the

socket.

to

replace

the

-44

Xeplacement

blades

come

in

digerent types and

are

removed

in

different ways.

To

replace the wiper

blade

assembly:

1.

Position

the wipers

on

the

windshield

in

the

“mid’’

wipe

position.

windshield. Note:

The

windshieid

wiper

does

not

have

a

’;ocking

upright positior~ feature.

2.

Lift

the windshield

wiper

m

away

from

the

3.

4.

5.

Push

the

tab

OR

the

wiper biade assembly

2nd

pull

the

assembly

dcwn

enough

to

release

it

from

the

“U”

hooked

end

of

the

wiper

m.

Slide

the assembly

away

from

the

am.

Replace the blade.

TQ

reinstall the wiper

blade

assembly, slide

it,

over

the

wiper

m

to

engage the

“U”

hooked

end

QII

the

wiper

blade

assembly. Full

up

on

the

assembly

to

lock

it

into

place.

For

the

correct

windshield

wiper blade replacement

length

and

type,

see

“Nomal Maintenance Replacement

Parts’’

in the Index.

77;

I.

.:.

._

$.Q-..l,

li-

Lfa

Your

new vehicle comes

with

high-quality

tires

made

by

a leading tire manufacturer.

If

you

ever Rave questions

about

YQW

tire

warranty

md

where

to

obtain

service, see

your

Buick

Wmmty

booklet

for

details.

Q

8

The

Tire-Loading

Infamation

label,

which

is

located

on

the

rear edge

of

the driver’s

door

shows

the correct

inflation

pressures for

your

tires when they’re

cold.

“CoId”

means

your

vehicle

has

been

sitting

for

at

least

three hours

OH

driven

no

more

than

1

mile

(1.6

km).

Cheek

Use

a

good quality pocket-type gage

t~

check

tire

pressure. You can’t

tell.

if

your

tires

ae properly inflated

simply by

looking

at them.

Radial

tires may

lo&

properly inflated even

when

they’re underinnflated.

Be sure to put the

valve

caps

back

on

the

valve

stems.

They help prevent leaks by

keeping

OU~

dirt

md

moisture.

(?-&e&

pgessnre

sy$&ekB

@f

Eqa@p&)

The check tire pressure

system

can de& you to

a

large change

in

the

pressure

of

one

tire.

The

system

won’t

alert

you before you chive

that

a

tire

is

low

or

flat.

You

must

begin

driving

before the system

will

work properly.

The

TIRE

PRESSURE

LOW

CHECK

TIRES

message

will

appear

on the Driver

hf~~~~~ati~n

Center

(DK)

if

pressure in

one

tire

becomes

at

least

10

psi

(69

Wa)

lower

or

higher

than

the other thee tires.

The

check

tire

pressure system won’t alert you

if

more

than

one

tire

is

Bow

or

high,

or

if

the system

is

not calibrated properly.

It

also

won’t tell

YOU

which

tire

is

Bow or

high.

E

the anti-lock brake system waning light comes

on,

the check tire pressure system may not be working

properly. See your deder for service. (Also,

see

“Anti-hck Brake System

Wzming Light”

in

the

Index.)

The check tire pressure system detects differences in tire

rotation speeds that are caused

by

changes

in

tire

pressure. The system can alert

you

about

a

OW

tire

--

but it doesn’t replace

normal

tire maintenance. See

“Tires”

in

the

Index.

When

the

TIRE

PRESSURE

LOW:

CWECK

TIRES

message appears

on

the

Driver

Information

Center,

you

should

stop

as

soon

as

YOU

can

and

check

all

your

tires

for

damage.

(If

a

tire

is

flat,

see

‘‘If

a

Tire

Goes

Flat”

in

the Index.)

Also

check the tire pressure

in

all

four

tires

as

SOOIZ

2s

you

can.

See “Inflati~n-Tire

Pressure”

in

the

Index.

Any time

you

adjust tire’s pressure

or

have one or

more

tires repaired

or

replaced, you’ll need

to

reset

(calibrate) tE-ae check

tire

pressure system.

YOU’BI

a~so

Reed

to

reset the

system

whenever

you

rotate the tires,

buy new

rim,

install

or remove the compact

spare,

and

whenever the vehicle‘s battery

has

been disconnected.

Don’t

reset the check tire pressure system without first

correcting the

cause

of

the

problem

and

checking

and

adjusting

the

pressure in

all

four

tires.

If

you

reset the

system when the tire pressures are incorrect, the check

tire presswe system will

not

work properly

and

may

~QB

alert

you

when

a

tire

is

Bow

or

high.

To

reset (calibrate)

the

system:

3.

Press

and

hold

the CIC

RESET

button

for

abut

five seconds. After

five

seconds,

the

display

will

show

TIRE

PRESSUFE

RESET.

Hf

TIE

PRESSURE

RESET

does

not

appear

on

the

display

after about five seconds, see

your

dealer for service.

After

you

release the

DIC

RESET

button,

TIRE

PRESSURE

NORMAL

will appear

on

the

display.

The system completes the calibration process

during

driving.

During

the

first

10

to

25

miles

(

I5

to

40

kw)

of

drivhg, the system

will

not

alert you

if

a

tire is

high

or

SOW.

After

25

to

EOO

miles

(40

to

160

h>,

the

system

will

oniy alert

YOU

about pressure differences of

12

psi

(85

Wa)

or

more. After about

100

miles

(160

h)

of

driving,

the system will

alert

you

if

one

tire

is

IO

psi

(69

kPaj

different

from

the other

thee

tires.

Wen

rotating

your

tires,

always

use

the

correct

rotation

pattern

shown

here.

After

the

tires

have

been rotated,

adjust

the

Eront

and

rear

inflation

pressures

as

shown

on

the

Tire-Loading

Information

label.

Make

certain

that

all

wheel

nuts

are properly tightened. See "Wheel

Nut

Torque"

in

the Index.

One

way

to

tell

when

it’s

time

for new tires

is

to

check

the

treadwear

inciicatdlrs,

which

will

appear

when

yQx

tires have

only

1/16

inch

(H

.e

mm)

car

less

of

tread

remaining.

8

The

tread

or

sidewall

is

cracked,

cut

or

snagged

deep

enough

to

show

cord

OF

fabric.

If

you

ever

replace

YOUF

tires

with

those

not

having

a

TPC

Spec

number,

make sure

they

are

the

sme

size,

load

rmge,

speed

rating

and

~OI-LS~IUC~~Q~

type

(bias,

bias-beited

or

radial)

as

your

original

tires.

Q

e

U~ffJrpx

Qna&y

K&-&&qg

m~

The

following infomation relates

to

the system

developed by the United States

National

Highway

Traffic Safety'Administration, which

grades

tires by

treadwear, traction and temperature pedommce.

(This

applies only to vehicles sold in the 'United

States.) The grades are

molded

on

the

sidewalls of

most

passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire

Quality

Grading

system does

not

apply

to

deep tread, winter-type

S~QW

tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with

nominal

rim

diameters

of

10

to

12

inches

(25

to

30

cm),

or

to

some

limited-production tires.

IVhile the tires available on Generd Motors passenger

cars

and

light

trucks

may

vary

with respect to these

grades, they

must

also

confom to Federal safety

requirements

and

additional

General Motors Tire

Performance Criteria

(PC)

standards.

''I+he

brcadwear grade

is

a comparative rating based

Q~Z

t

tze

wcx

rate

of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions

on

a specified government test course.

For

example, a tire graded

150

would wear one

md

a

Mf

(I

U2)

times as well on

the

government course

:H

tire graded

100.

The relative performance

of

tires

depends

upon

the actual conditions

of

their use,

however, and may depart significantly from the norm

tErrc

to

variations

in

driving

habits, service practices

and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

'The traction grades, from highest

to

!owest, are

A,

3,

and

C,

and they represent the tire's ability

to

stop

ora

wet pavement

as

measured

mder

controlled conditions

on

specified government test surfaces

of

asphalt

2nd

concrete.

A

tire marked

&:

may have poor

traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned

to

this tire

is

based

on

braking

(straight alead) traction tests

and

does

not

ifgcllude

cornering (turning) traction.

heat

and

its

ability

to

dissipate

heat

when

tested

under

controlled

csndidsns

on

a

specified

indoor

laboratory

test

wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause

the

material

of

the tire

to

degenerate

and

reduce tire life,

and

excessive ternperaFure

can

lead

to

sudden

fire

faifwe.

The

grade

C

corresponds to

a

level

of

pedomance

which

ail

passenger

cx

tires

must

meet

e~nder

the

Federal

Motor

Vehicle Safety

Stmda-d

No.

i09.

Grades

B

asci

A

represent higher levels

of

perhmance

an

the

laboratory

test wheel than the

minimum

required

by

law.

The wheels

OR

your

vehicle were aligned

and

balanced

careEulIy

at

the factory

to

give

you

the longest tire life

acd

best

overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment

and

wheel

balancing

are

not

needed. However, if

you

notice

unusual tire wear

or

your vehicle pulling

GR~

way

OF

the

other,

the

akignment

may need

to

be reset.

If

YOU

notice your vehicle

vibrating

when

driving on

a

smooth

road, your wheels

may need

to

be rebalaaaced.

-.-

,.

sed

7-h

$.-&&&c,:&,~

=-

‘0

.

-.‘?3.

r

?;%;?e&

.-

.%

how

far

it’s been driven.

It

could fail suddenly

and

cause an accident.

If

you have

to

replace

a

wheel, use

a

new

GM

original equipment wheel.

:-.-%

0

iCI?&?,S

-

NOTICE:

Use tire chains only where

Begal

and

only

when

YOU

must. Use only

SAE

Class

“S”

type chains

that are the proper size

for

your tires. Install

them

on

the

front tires and tighten them

as

tightly

as

possible with the ends securely

fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain

manufacturer’s instructions.

If

you

can hear

the

chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten

them.

If

the contact continues,

slow

down until

it

stops.

Driving too

fast

or

spinning

the

wheels

with

chains

on

will damage your vehicle.

&&@L@-~anp~

calTe

LA

Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some

are

toxic. Others can burst into flame

if

yor: strike

a

match

or

get them

on

a

hot

part

of

the vehicle. Some are

dangerous

if

you breathe their fumes in

a

closed space.

When

you

use

anything

from

a

cormtair,er to clean your

vehicle,

be

sure

to

follow the manufacturer’s warnings

and

instructions. And always open your

doors

or

windows when you’re cleaning

the

inside.

Never

use

these

to

clean your vehicle:

Gasoiine

Benzene

Naphtha

Carbon

TetracMoride

Acetone

Paint Thinner

Turpenfirre

Lacquer Thinner

Nail Polish Remover

They can

a11

be hazardous

--

some more

than

others

--

and they can all damage your vehicle,

too.

Don’t

use any

of

these unless this manual says

you

can.

In

many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

Alcohol

Laundry

Soap

Bleach

@

Reducing Agents

Use

a

vacuum cleaner often

to

get rid

of

dust and loose

dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic

and

painted surfaces

with

B

clean, damp cloth.

Your deaier has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior

Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent

Dry

Spot

and Soil

Remover

for

cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean

normal spots and stains very well. You can get

GM-approved cleaning products from

your

dealer. (See

“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Here

are

some cleaning tips:

Always read the instructions

011

the

cleaner label.

Clean up stains

as

soon

as

you can

--

before they set.

Carefully scrape

off

any excess stain.

0

Use

a

clean cloth or sponge, and change

to

a clean area

often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.

0

If

a

ring

forms

after spot cleaning, clean the entire

area immediately or it will

set.

1

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Vacuum and

brush

the area

to

remove any loose

dirt.

Always

clean

a

whoie

trim

panel

or section.

Mask

surrounding

trim

along

stitch

or

welt lines.

lwix

powdered cleaner

fobwing

the

directions

on

the container label to

f~m

thick

suds.

Use

suds

only

and

apply

with

a

clean sponge. Don’t

saturate the material

and

don’t

nab

it

roughiy.

As

SOQ~

as

you’ve cleaned the section, use

a

sponge

*is

remove

the

suds.

Wipe cleaned area

with

a

clean,

damp

towel

or

cloth.

Wipe

with

a

clean

cloth

and

let

dry.

I.

Carefirlly scrape

off

excess stain,

then

sponge the

soiled

area with

CQOI

water.

2.

If

a

stain remains,

folkow

the

multi-purpose interior

cleaner instructions described earlier.

3.

If

an

odor

lingers

after

cleaning

vomit

or urine,

treat

the

area with

a

waterbaking soda

solution:

I

teaspoon

(5

ml)

of

baking

soda

to

B

cup

(250

ml>

of

lukewm

water.

4.

Let dry.

Stains

caused

by

candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili

sauce and unknown stains can be removed

as

follows:

I.

Carefully scrape

off

excess stain.

2.

First,

clean with

cool

water

and

ailow

to

dry

completely.

3.

If

a

stain remains,

follow

instructions

€or

Multi-Purpose Interior

Cleaner.

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

@

Rub

with

a

clean,

damp

cloth

to

remove

dirt.

You

may

have

to

do

it

more than once.

Things Hike tar,

asphalt

and

shoe

polish

will

stain

if

you

don't

get

them

off

quickly.

Use

a

clean

cloth

and a vinylAeather cleaner. See

pur

dealer for

this

produce.

Use

a

so€t

cloth with lukewarm water

and

a

mild

soap

or

saddle

soap

and

wipe

dry

with a

soft

cloth. Then, let the

leather

dry

naturally.

Do

not

me

heat

to

dry.

e

For

stubborn

stains,

use

a

leather cleaner. See your

dealer for

this

product.

0

Never

rnse

oils,

varaishes,

solvent-based or abrasive

cleaners, furniture

polish

or

shoe

polish

on

leather.

0

Soiled

or

stained leather

S~QUM

be cleaned

immediately.

If

dirt

is

allowed

to

work into the

finish. it can harm the leather.

Vacuum

around

a

speaker cover gently,

so

that the

speaker

won't

be

damaged. Clean spots with

just

water

and

miid

soap.

f-7

&kgL&

I9

TQ

:..

fl.<:

>&7;L&T'

'2

m

-B&t.:

u

Keep

kclts

clem

and

dry.

might

not

he

dole

to

provide

adequate protection.

Ckrn

safety

helis

only

with

mild

soap

and

lukewarm

wttter.

fiTY4"cx<..

t.,LGaL&p

tz&gs

&%*

~,u&k-*,pq

k

".

--

u,

i-.

Glass

sirodd

be

clculcd

o.Aen.

GM

Glass Cleaner

(GM

Part

No.

1050427)

or

a

Liquid

household glass cleaner

will

remove

tzosrnal

tobucco

smoke and dust films

on

interior

glass.

Don't

use

abrasive cleuners

on

glass, because they may

cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear

window, since they

may

have

to

be scraped

off

later.

If

abrasive cleaners are

used

on the inside

of

the rear

window, an electric defogger element may

be

damaged.

Any temporary license should not be attached across

the

defogger grid.

If

the windshield is not clear after using the windshield

washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,

wax,

sap

or

other materid may be on the blade

or

windshield.

Clean the outside

of

the windshield with

GM

Windshield Cleaner,

Bon

AmiB Powder (non-scratching

glass cleaning powder),

GM

Bart

No.

10500

1

I.

The

windshield

is

clean if beads do not

form

when

you

rinse it with water.

Grime

from

the windshield will stick

to

the wiper

blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade

by wiping vigorously with

a

cloth soaked

in

full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then

rinse the blade with water.

Check

the

wiper blades and clean them

as

necessary;

replace blades that

look

worn.

Silicone grease

on

weatherstrips

will

make them

last

longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply

silicone grease with a clean cloth

at

least every

six

m~ntias.

During very

cold,

damp

weather

more

frequent application

may

be

required. (See

“Reccmmended Fluids

and

%ubricants”

in

the Index.)

The paint

finish

on

your vehicle provides beauty, depth

of

color,

gloss

retention

2nd

durability.

The best

way

to

preserve

your vehicle’s

finish

is

to

keep

it

dean

by

washing

it

sften

with Imkewm

cr

cold

water.

Dor~’:

wash your vehicle

in

the direct rays

of

the sun.

hn’t

use strong

soaps

or chemical detergents. Use

liquid

hand,

dish

cx

car

washing

(mild

detergent)

soaps.

You

can get GM-approved cleaning products from your

dealer. (See “Appearance Care

and

Materials” in

the

Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that

are

petroleum

based, or

that

contain acid or abrasives.

ALE

cleaning

agents

shoer%d

be ilushed

promptly

2nd

not ahwed

to

dry

on

the surface,

or

they

couid

stain.

Dry

the finish

with

a

soft,

clean chamois or an AI-cotton towel

to

avoid

surface scratches

and

water

spotting.

High pressure

car

washes may

cause

water

to

enter

your

vehicle.

OccasicsnaI

waxing

or

mild

polishing

of

your vehicle

by

hand may be necessary

to

remove residue

from

the

paint

finish.

You

can get GtM-approved cleaning

products from

your

dealer. (See “Appearance Care

and Materiais”

in

the

Index.)

Your

Buick

has

a

“basecoat/cEearcoat” paint finish.

The

clearcoat gives

more

depth and

gloss

to

the

colored basecoat. Always use waxes

and

polishes

that are non-abrasive and made

for

a

basecoatklearcoat

paint

finish.

1

I

rinsing thoroughly,

dry

with

a

soft

dean towel.

A

I

NOTICE:

-

I

wax may then be

appied.

-I

The surface

of

these wheels

is

similar

to

the painted

Machine compounding

or

aggressive polishing

on

abrasive cleaning

brushes

OR

them because you could

finish

or

leave

swirl

marks.

chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners

or

a

basecoatklearcoat paint

finish

may dull the

surface of your vehicie.

Don’t

use strong soaps,

damage the surface.

You

may

use

chrome

polish

on

chrome wheels, but avoid any painted surface

of

the

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other wheel,

and

buff

off

immediately after application.

salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird

droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can

Don’t

take

your

vehicle

through

an

automatic

car

wash

damage your vehicle’s finish

if

they remain

on

painted that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These

surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon

as

possible.

If

brushes can

also

damage the surface

of

these wheels.

necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners ihat

are

marked

safe for painted surfaces

to

remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces

are

subject

to

aging, weather

To

clean your tires, use

a

stiff

brush

with

a tire cleaner.

and chemical fallout that can take their toll over

a

period

I

of years.

You

can

help to keep the paint finish looking

new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered

whenever possible.

Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with

mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After

I

NOTICE:

When applying a tire dressing always take care

to

wipe

off

any overspray

or

splash from all

painted surfaces

on

the body or wheels

of

the

vehicle. Petroleum-based products

may

damage

the paint finish.

If

your vehicle is damaged

and

requires sheet metal

repair

or

replacement, make sure the body repair shop

applies anti-corrosion material

to

the parts repaired

or

replaced

to

restore corrosion protection.

Any stone

chips,

fractures

or

deep scratches in the finish

should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode

quickly and may develop into

a

major

repair expense.

Minor

chips

and

scratches can be repaired with

IOUCR-UP

materials available

from

your dealer

or

other service

outlets. Larger areas

of

finish damage can be corrected

in

your

dealer's body and paint

shop.

Chemicals used €or ice and

snow

removal and dust

control can collect on the underbody.

If

these are not

removed, accelerated corrosion

(rustj

can occur on

the underbody

parts

such as fuel lines, frame,

floor

pan and exhaust system even though they have

corrosion protection.

At least every

spring,

Rush

these materials

from

the

underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where

mud

and other debris can collect.

Dirt

packed in

ciosed

areas

of

the frame should be loosened before being

flushed. Your dealer

or

an underbody car

washing

system can

do

this for you.

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create

a

chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fail upon

and

attxk

painted surfaces on your vehicle.

This

damage can take two

forms:

blotchy, ringlet-shaped

discolorations,

and

small irregular dark spots etched

into the paint surface.

Although

no

defect in the

paint

job

causes this, Buick

will repair,

at

no

charge

to

the owner, the surfaces

of

new vehicles damaged

by

this fallout condition within

I2

months

or

12,000

miles

(20

000

km)

of

ourchase,

whichever

CCCU~S

first.

1

1052918""

1

8

02.

(0.237

L)

I

Protects ieather,

wood,

acrylics, Plexiglas

w,

plastic,

mbber

and

vinvl

1

1052925

f

Cleaner

and

floor

mats

Multi-Purpose interior

C1em.s

carpets,

seats, interior

trim.

door panels

I

U

1

SAMPLE4UXWM072675

I

E!

I

ENGINE

A98

f

1

ASSEMBLY

CbDE

A

MODEL

YEAR

PLANT

This

is

the legal identifier

for

your vehicle. It appears on

a

plate

in

the front comer

of

the instrument panel,

on

the

driver's side. You can

see

it

if

you

look

through the

windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN

also

appears on the Vehicle Certification

and

Service

Parts

labels and

the

certificates

of

title

and

registration. Be sure that this label is

not

removed

from

the

vek-rlc?~.

NOTICE:

Don’t

add

anything electrical

to

your vehicle

unless you check with your dealer first. Some

electrical equipment can damage your vehicle

and

the damage wouldn’t be covered by your

warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment

can keep other components

from

working

as

they should.

Your

vehicle

has

an

air

bag system. Before attempting

to

add

anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing

Your

Air

Bag-Equipped Vehicle”

in

the Index.

To

check ;he fuses

in

this underhood

fuse

center,

mrn

the

knob

to

the

left

and

remove the cover. There is a

chart

inside the cover that explains

the

features

and

controls governed by each fuse

and

relay.

The wiring circuits in your vehicle

are

potected

from

short

circuits

by

a

combination

of

fuses

and circuit

breakers. This greatly reduces ?;he chance

of

damage

caused

by

electrical problems.

Look

at

the silver-cobred

band

inside the

fuse.

If

the

band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure

you

replace

a

bad

fuse with a new one

of

the identical size

and rating.

Tlere

are

three fase blocks

in

your vehicle: the

Instrument

Pace1

Fuse Block located under the

instrument panel, the Underhood Fuse Block located

QTP

the passenger's side engine compartment and

the

Xear

Fuse Block, located under the rear seat.

I.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Remove

the

two

7

mm

screws

located

aIsng

the

front edge

of

the panel.

Lower the

hush

panel. The fuse block is

a

rectangular covered

box

iocated

on

the

far

right

side

under

the instrument panel.

Remove

the

cover.

Now

you

can

see the

hses

2nd

replace them.

Place the wide

end

of

the

he

puller over the plastic

end

of

the

f;crse.

Squeeze the

ends

over

the fuse

and

pull

it

out.

Spare

fuses

are

located

in

the enpty

slots

shown

OR

the

foliowing

chat.

When

finished,

repiace the

hush

panei. Replace lamps,

connectors,

and

HVAC

duct temperature sensors

if

they

were removed.

(G)

I

Fuse

Usage

SBM

Intr Lamps

PASSMOL

PDM Module

NC

HVAC Motor, HVAC

Mix

Motors

IGN

SEN

EC

Mirror, Driver HTS Seat, Rear

Defog Relay, MEM Module,

Cool

LVL

Sensor, Pass Heated Seat

Fuse

ELC

ABS

HVAC

CR

CON"

HUD

CSTWSBM

LB

PK

E

LP

PK

R

RUN

wsw

EMPTY

RFARSEN

B/U

LP

Usage

HVAC

Rat

Bk

Mtrs,

EkC

Sensor,

EEC

Sensor

(R

Bec)

Anti-Lock

Brake

System Moduie

KVAC

Main

Con

Head, HVAC

Programmer,

HPC

Stepper

Motor

CR,

Cruise

Switch

HUD

Switch,

HUD

DispIay

WVAC i'rograrnrner,

IPC

(Cluster),

Underhood

LP,

L

PUSide

Mk,

L

PK/Turn

Lmp,

SBM,

L

Tail Sig

Lmp,

L

Tail Stop

Lmp,

L

Rear

Side

Mks

Rt

PWSide

Mkr

imp,

Rt

PwTFurn

Lamp,

Wt

TaiUSign

Lamp,

Rt

TaiUStoplarnp,

R:

Rear Sidemarker,

Stopflail

Lamp,

Tail/Sig

Lamp,

License

Lamp,

RFA

Run/Acsry

Wiper Motor

Not

Used

Wiper Switch,

Wa,

Rain

Sense

E/C Minor, Back-up

Lamps

SBM

(275

to

LCM)

(1

135

to

BTSH

SL)

7

37

38

m

40

42

Position

Circuitry

1

Not

Used

2

RFA,

SBM,

IPC,

LCM

3

Turn

Signal,

Hazard

Switch

4

Re Oxygen Sensor,

Post

Oxygen Sensor

Ignition

Module

Rt

Hi

Beam

Not

Used

Lt

Hi

Beam

Not

Used

Rt

Low

Beam

Lt Low

Beam

21

22

23

24

2%

26

24

29

30

31

Welay--Tgn

Relay--Worn

ReTay--Cooling

Fan

#2

ReTay--Theft

1

Position

32

33

34

35

36

37

as

39

40

41

42

43

44

TQ

Rear

BEC-Seats

To

HP

BEC

‘“Run”

Starter

Welays

High

Speed

Fan

Rly

6-68

I

(7)

6

7

16

17

Not

Used

20

Fuel

Door

Re1

Sol,

Tmnk

Re1

Relay,

DLC

Position Circuitry

21

Not

Used

1.

Pull

up

on

the

front

of

the

cushion

to

release

the

front

hooks.

2.

Pull

the

cushion

up

and

out

toward

the

front

of

To

Reinst.4 the Rear Seat

Cwhicban

the

vehicle.

26

27

28

at

.Rear

cig

Les

E&

Rear

Cig

Ltr

RFA,

Mem

Seat

Module,

Driver

Seat

Switch

cushion.

To

help avoid damage to the fuse

center, be careful when removing

or

reinstalling

the seat

cushion.

4.

Check

to

make

sure the

safety

belts are properly

routed

and

that

no

p~rtion

of

any

safety

belt

is

trapped under

the

seat.

Also

make

sure

the

seat

cushion

is

secured.

A

safety belt that isn’t properly routed through

the

seat

cushion or

is

twisted

won’t

provide the

protection needed

in

a

crash.

If

the sa€ety beit

hasn’t

been routed through the seat cushion

at

all,

it

won’t

be there

to

work for the next

passenger. The person sitting

in

that

position

couId

be badly injured. After reinstalling

the

seat

cushion, always check

to

be sure that the safety

belts are properly routed and

are

not

twisted.

I.

2.

3.

Buckle the center passenger

position

safety beE:, then

route the safety belts though

the

proper

slots

in

the

seat

csshion.

Don’t

let

the safety belts get twisted.

Slide the rear

of

the

cushion

up

and

under

the

seatback

so

the

rear

locating

guides

hook

into the

wire loops

on

the

back

frame.

With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward

and

then press

down

on

the

seat

cushion

until

the

spring

locks

on

both ends engage.

EXTERIOR

BBJIAB

Headlamp

High-Beam

...........................

9005

Zow-Beam

...........................

9006

ParWTum,

Front

.........................

3057

Back-up

...............................

3057

Tai1Rtu-n

...............................

3057

TaiVStQp

...............................

3857

For

service

information

on

other

bulbs,

contact

your

dealer’s

service department.

The following approximate capacities are given in English

and

metric

conversions.

Please

refer

to

“Recommended

Fluids

and Lubricants” in

the

Index

for

more information.

Automatic Transaxle AT (Overdrive)

Pan

Removal and Replacement

...................................................

6

quarts

(5.6

L)

After Complete Overhaul

......................................................

1

I

quarts

(10.4

E)

When draining

or

replacing torque convertep; nzore fluid may be needed.

Belt Tensions

Automatically controlled by a Self-Tension idler pulley. Tension adjustment

should

never

be

necessary.

Cooling System

.............................................................

13

quarts

(12.3

k)

Engine Crankcase

Oil change with filter change

...................................................

4.5

quarts

(4.3

L)

Power

Steering

Complete System

............................................................

1

1/2

pints

(0.7

L)

Tire Pressure

See

the

Tire-Loading Information label on the rear edge

of

the driver’s

door.

WheelNutTorque

........................................................

1001b-ft(140N-m)

R-134a

Air

Conditioning

................................

See refrigerant charge label under the hood.

FuelTank

................................................................

18SgaIlons(70L)

PumpOnly

.....................................................................

1pint(OSE)

NOTE:

All

capacities are approximate. When adding,

be

sure

to

fill

to

the appropriate level, as recommended

in

this manual.

Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the

same.

If

the

air

conditioning system in

your

vehicle needs

refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant

is

used.

If

you’re not sure,

ask

your dealer.

Engine

3800

Engine

3800

Supercharged

Engine

VIN

Engine Code

..............................

K

...............................

1

Type

.......................................

V6

..............................

V6

Displacement

................................

3.8L

............................

.3.8%,

Compression

Ratio

...........................

9:4:

1

............................

85:

1

Horsepower

.................................

205

..............................

240

Firing Qrder

.............................

1-6-5-4-3-2

......................

1-6-5-4-3-2

Thermostat Temperature Specification

........

195°F (91°C)

.....................

195°F (91°C)

Qverall

Length

.................

206.8

inches (525.3

cm)

Width

...................

74.7 inches

(

B

89.7

cm)

Height

...................

58.8

inches (147.6

cm)

Wheelbase

..............

B

13.8

inches

(289.1

cm)

Front

Tread

...............

62.7 inches (159.3

cm)

Rear

Tread

...............

62.3

inches

(158.2

cm)

"..

-

?$

~.p~~~$

5

~~4a~~.~ena~~~~

T:.

'..

17.

~~~~ja-aee~~~~~~~

,

..-.

yay&

Engine

Oil

Filter

................

AC

Type

PF-47

_L

Air Cleaner Element

..........

AC

Type

A-

1096C

Fuel

Filter

....................

AC

Type GF-627

Spark

Plugs

...................

AC Type

41-921

Gap:

0.060

inch

(.

152

crn)

Windshield Wiper Blades

Type

............................

Hook

Style

Length

.....................

22

inches

(56

cm)

Filter

(HVAC

air

filter)

.....

GM

Part

No.

52472175

Passenger Compartment

Air

&g&ze

&yggsGyy

15

jL2Q

e.

,.',

E

c/

I'

The

3800

(L36)

engine uses an engine accessory belt.

This

diagram

shows

the features connected

by

the belt

routing.

See "Maintenance Schedule"

in

the

Index

for

when to check the belt.

A

C

A.

Power Steering

B.

Generator

C.

Air Conditioning

D.

Crank

E.

Coolant

Pump

E

Tensioner

1.

Front

Belt

C.

Crank

2.

Back Belt

D.

Supercharger

A.

Generator

E.

Coolant Pump

B.

Power Steering

IF.

Air

Conditioning

The Supercharged

3800

engine uses two accessory

drive

belts. One belt

drives

the

generator,

power steering

pump, coolant

pump

surd

air

conditioning compressor.

The

second

belt

drives

the superchwger.

Each

belt has

its own tensioner

mi

idler pulley.

See

‘‘Maintenance

Schedule” in the Index

for

when

to

check

he

accessory

drive

belts

and supercharger oil level. Have

your

dealer

check the

oil

level

in

the

supercharger.

7-

2

7-3

7-4

7-3

1

7-3

1

Introduction

How

This

Section is Organized

Bart

A:

Scheduled Maintenance Services

Using

Your

Maintenance Schedule

Selecting the Right Schedule

Part

B:

Owner Checks

and

Services

At

Each

Fuei

Fill

At

Least

oncc

a

h4onth

At

Least

Twice

a

Year

At

Least

Once

a

Year

Part

C:

Periodic Maintenance hspections

Part

D:

Recommended Fluids

and

Lubricants

Part

E:

Maintenance Record

I

IMPORTANT*

KEEP

ENGINE

OIL

AT

THE

PROPER

LEVEL

ANI)

CHANGE

AS.

RECOMMENDED

Have you puschased

the

GM

Prwotectiorz

Plan?

The

Plan

supplements

~ous

new vehicle war{-unties.

See

your

Warranty

und

Owner

AssistaPzce

booklet,

or

your

Buick

deuler.for details.

Jr ceep

yor

vehicle in

good

working

condition,

but

&o

helps the

environment.

AEB

reconirnended maintenance procedures

are

important.

Improper vehicle maintenance can even

affect

the

quality

of

the air we breathe. Improper

fiuid

Ievels

or

the wrong tire

infiation

can increase the level

of

emissions

from

your

vehicle.

To

help protect our

environment,

and

to

keep your vehicle

in

good

condition,

please maintain your vehicle properly.

._y

0

C.

12‘3\+7

p

&-2cbisn

Tq

LL

<i.

4.

E

AT’.

>.

--o.-.-G+.

7..

.:

v.:fi.::+

C&,hAkLA.d&

-1

---

Lj

The remainder

of

this section is divided into five

pms:

”Part

A:

Scheduled Maintenance Services”

shows

what

to

have done and how oftec. Some

of

these

services

can

be complex,

so

unless you

are

technically

qualified and have the necessary equipnent, you should

let your dealer’s service department

or

another qualified

service center

do

these

jobs.

Performing maintenance work on

a

vehicle can

be dangerous.

In

trying to

do

some

Jobs,

you

can

be seriously injured.

Do

your

own

maintenance

work

O~Y

if you have the required

know-how

and the proper

tools

and equipment for the

job.

If

you have any doubt, have

a

qualified

technician

do

the

work.

If

you

are

skilled enough

to

do

some

work

on

your

vehicle, you will probably want

to

get the service

information. See “Service and Owner Publications”

in

the Index.

“Part

8:

Owner

Cheeks

and

Services”

tells you

what should be checked and when.

It

also

explains

what

YOU

can easily

do

to

help keep your vehicle

in

good

condition.

“Part

C:

Periodic Maintenance

Inspections”

explains important inspections

that

your

deater’s

service department or another

quaiifled

service

center

should perfom.

“Part

D:

Recommended

Fluids

and

Llph~ricipn~’’

lists

some recommended

products

to

hcBp

keep

your

vehicle properly

maintained.

T’kzesc

19n~lucts,

or their

equivalents, should

be

used

wlacikct.

you

do

the work

yourself or have

it

done.

“Past

E:

Maintenance

Record’’

provides a,place

for

you to record the

~naintcrrance

performed on

your

vehicle. Whenever

any

n:aintcnancc

is

performed,

be

sure to write

it

down

in

Ffris

part.

’his

will help

you

determine

when

your

In addition,

it

is

;L

good

idca

to

keep

your

maintenance

receipts.

They

may

be

rleedcd

to

qualify your vehicle

for

warranty

repairs.

We at General Motors want

to

kelp you keep your

vehicle

ia

good working condition. But we don’t

know exactly

how

you’ll drive

it.

You may drive very

short distances only

a

few

times

a

week. Or you may

drive long distances

aEB

the time in

very

hot, dusty

weather.

You

may

use

your vehicle in making deliveries.

Or

YOU

may

drive it

to

work,

to

do

errands or

in

many other

ways.

Because

of

all

thc

different

ways people use their

vehicles, maintenance

rreeds

vary.

You

may even

need

more

frequent

checks

and

repiacements than

you’ll

find

in

the

schedules

in this section.

So

please

read this section

and

note

how

you

drive. If you have

any questions on how to keep your vehicle in

good

condition, see

your

Buick dealer.

This part tells

you

the maintenance services you should

have done and when you should schedule them. If you

go

to

your dealer

for

your service needs, you’ll know

that GM-trained and supported service people will

perform the work

using

genuine

GM

parts.

The proper fluids and

lubricants

to use are listed

in

Part

D.

Make sure whoever services your vehicle

uses these. All

parts

should

be replaced

and

a1

necessary repairs done before you

or

anyone else

drives the vehicle.

These schedules

are

for

vehicles that:

cany passengers and cargo within recommended

limits.

You

will find these limits on your vehicle’s

Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your

Vehicle”

in

the Index.

are

driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal

use

the recommended fuei. See

“Fuel”

in the Index.

driving limits.

First you’ll need to decide which

of

the

two

schedules

is

right for your vehicle. Here’s

how

to

decide which

schedule

to

follow:

i

~~

Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

if

any

one of these conditions

is

true for your vehicle:

0

Most

trips

are less than

5

to

10

miles

(8

to

I6

km).

This

is

particularly important when outside

temperatures are below freezing.

Most

trips

include extensive idling (such as frequent

driving

in

stop-and-go

traffic).

Most

trips

are

through dusty areas.

You

frequently tow

a

trailer

or

use

a

carrier on

tog

of

your vehicle.

If the vehicle

is

used

for

delivery service, police, taxi

or other commercial application.

One

of

the reasons you

should

follow

this

schedule

if

you

operate

your

vehicle under any

of

these conditions

is

that these conditions cause engine oil

to

break

down

soonep:

r---

ShQTt

7&+p/cigy

&$-~~y&

c

..

6

-

I-

Every

3,000

Miles

(5

000

km):

Engine

Oil

md

Filter

Every

6,000

Miles

(10

000

km):

Chassis Lubrication

Every

12,000

Miles

(20

000

km):

Passenger

Every

15,000

Miles

(25

000

km):

Air Cleaner Filter

Every

30,000

Miles

(50

000

km):

Air Cleaner Filter

Change (or

3

months,

whichever occurs first).

(or

6

mo-nth, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.

Compartment Air Filter Replacement.

Inspection,

if

driving in dusty conditions.

Replacement. Fuel

Tank,

Cap and Lines Inspection.

Supercharger

Oil

Check (or every

36

months,

whichever occurs first)

(3.8L

Code

I

engine only).

Every

50,000

Miles

(83

080

km):

Automatic Transaxle

Service (severe conditions only).

Every

60,000

Miles

(100

000

km):

Engine Accessory

Drive Belt Inspection.

Every

100,000

Miles

(166

000

km):

Spark Plug Wire

Inspection.

Spark

Plug

Replacement.

Every

150,000

Miles

(240

000

km):

Cooling System

Service

(or

every

60

months, whichever occurs first).

These intervals

only

summarize maintenance services.

Be

sure

to

follow

the complete maintenance schedule

on

the

following

pages.

RP

I

-3

Follow

this maintenance schedule

only

if

none

of

the

conditions

from

the

Short

Trip/City Maintenance

Schedule is true.

Do

not use this schedule if the vehicle

is

used for trailer towing, driven in

a

dusty area or used

of€

paved

roads.

Use

the

Short

TripKity schedule

for

these

conditions.

Driving

a

veizicie

with

a,fulky

warnzed

engine

utzckQ~

hig/wctv

cwatclition.,s

causm

C~I~~JW

oil

to

brcnk

down

S~OM~GP:

Every

7,500

Miles (12

500

km):

Engine

Oil

and

Filter

Change

(or

every

12

months, whichever occurs first).

Chassis Lubrication (or every

22

months, whichever

occurs first). Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles

(25

000

km):

Passenger

Compartment Air Filter Replacement.

Every

30,000

Miles (50

000

km):

Supercharger Oil

Check

(or

every

36

months, whichever occurs

first)

(3.8L

Code

I

engine

only).

Air

Cleaner Filter

Repiacernent. Fuel Tank,

Cap

ad

Lines Inspection.

Every

50,000

Miles

(83

000

km):

Automatic

Transaxle

Service (severe conditi~ns

oniy).

Every 60,QOO Miles (100

000

km):

Engine Accessory

Drive Belt Inspection.

Every

100,000

Miles (166

QOO

km):

Spark

Plug Wire

Inspection.

Spark

Plug

Replacement.

Every

150,000

Miles

(240

000

km):

Cooling System

Service

(or

every

60

months, whichever occurs first).

These

intervals

only

summarize maintenance services.

Be

sure

to

follow the complete maintenance schedule

on

the

following

pages.

m.

B

he services

shown

in

this schedule

up

to

IOO,QQ0

miles

(

166

000

am)

should

be performed after

100,800

miles

(

I.

66

008

km)

at

the

same

intervals. The services

shown

at

150,000

miles

(240

GOO

km)

shouid

be performed at

the same interval after

150,000

riles

(240

000

km).

See “Owner Checks and Services”

md

“Periodic

Maintenance inspections” following.

*

The

U.S.

Environmental Protection Agency

or

the

California Air Resources

Boxd

has

determined that the

failure

to

perform this maintenance item will

not

nuIli€y

the elmission wmanty or

limit

recall liability prior to

the completion

of

the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,

urge

that

ail

recommended maintenance services be

performed at the indicated intervals

and

the

maintenance be recorded.

#

Lubricate

the

transaxle

shift

linkage,

parking

brake

cable guides and the underbody contact points

and

linkage.

*

If

your vehicle

has

an

Engine

Oil

Life

Monitor

(Index),

the

monitor will

show

you

when

to

change the

oil

--

usually between

3,000

miles

(5

CIOC)

kn)

and

7,500

miles

(

12

500

lmj

since

your

last

oil

change.

Under severe conditions, the indicator

may

come

on

before

3,000

wiles

(5

000

h).

Never

drive

your

vehicle

more than

7,500

miles

(12

508

am>

or

i

2

months,

(whichever occurs

first),

without

an

oil

change.

Tne

system

won‘:

detect

dust

in

thc

oil.

So

if

you

drive

in

a

dusty area be

sure

to

change

pur

oil

every

3,000

miles

(5

008

km)

or

sooner

if:

the

CHANGE

OIL

message appears.

Remember

to

reset

the

Oil

Life

‘Monitor

when

the oil

has

been

changed.

For more

information, see “Engine

Oil

Life ,Monitor (Index)” in

the Index.

+

A

good

time

to

check your brakes

is

during tire

rotation. See

“Brake

System Inspection” under “Periodic

Maintenance Inspections” in

Part

C

of

this schedule.

0

Lubricate

chassis

components

(OF

every

6

months,

whichever

occurs

first).

Rotate tires. See

“Tire

Inspection

and

Rotation”

in

the

Index

for

proper

(See

footnote

At.)

rotation pattern

2nd

additional

infomation.

(See

footnote

+.)

0

Change engine

oil

and

filter

(~r

every

3

months,

whichever

occurs

first).

ABFZ

Emission

Control

Service.

(See footnote

*.)

I

e

9

1

DATE

J

MILEAGE

B

DATE

I

$1

SERVICED

BY

0

Rotate tires. See

“Tire

Inspection

and

Rotation”

in

the Index for

p~oger

rotation

pattern

and

additional

information.

(See

footnote

9.)

d2q

<cw

LG

$-$fi&?

.&:$

p&g&

2-

uc,*

s

:

,

f

+q,(G$.

a

rbt.

g.:

&:&

c

’i

,i

t

Cl

Chasge engine oil

and

filter

(or

every

3

months, whichever occurs first).

El

Inspect

air

cleaner filter if

you

are driving in dusty conditions. Replace

An

Emission

Control

Sewice.

(See footnote

*.)

filter if necessary.

An

Emission

Control

Service.

(See footnote?..)

,$

Q

:?$;:

;fi.

,:&

J;

?;$

,

/

G.

fi.

+qg:;r:.

Change engine oil

and

filter

(or

every

3

months, whichever

occurs

first).

Lubricate

chassis

components (or every

6

months, whichever

occurs

first).

0

Repiace passenger compartment air filter.

0

Rotate tires. See ‘‘Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index

for

proper

-;.a

.

,.d.$.

L:;e..L

7

;:

fiv

“.,.).“.I

:.‘

:$?”A:

:.

9\-‘

WL‘

g

u.

*g

i.

..,

k’b

$,

,>

An

Emission

Control

Service.

(See footnote

*.)

(See footnote

#.>

rotation pattern

and

additional information. (See footnote

+.>

2uGQ:b$g

Lp$$&c:3

f

&$

$Js:&

1

.”,;?.

,fT,r

‘.’,

F.

2;

I?

Is‘

/

Q

A

d;.ic

i>

--

I

i

13

Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter

if

the vehicle

is

mainly driven

under one

or

more

of

these conditions:

-

In

heavy city traffk where the outside temperature regularly reaches

-

In

hilly

or

mountainous terrain.

90°F

(32°C)

or

higher.

(Continued)

DATE

t

I

DATE

I

MILEAGE

u.-.i

G&J

iY&($&G&

?"&

ggu

&,'t.LP'&

,$

.?/$

f?$T.fi.

,.$/$-;

g

/,,

7

FQ:G

$?;fi+?,

&.,,

):

0

Change engine oil and filter

(or

every

3

months, whichever occurs

first).

0

Lubricate chassis components (or

every

6

months, whichever

occurs

first).

0

Rotate

tires.

See

"Tire Inspection

and

Rotation"

in

the Index €or groper

L

h

An

Emission Control

Service.

(See footnote

*.)

(See €ootnote

#.>

rotation pattern

and

additional information. (See footnote

+.)

DATE

I

DATE

i

6

0

Change

engine oil

and

filter

(or

every

3

months,

whichever occurs first).

An

Emission

Control

Service.

(See footnote

*.)

0

Change engine

oil

and

filter

(or

every

3

months,

whichever

OCCUFS

first).

Lubricate chassis

components

(or every

6

months, whichever occurs

first).

0

Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and

Rotation"

in the Index

for

proper

An

Emission

Cmrol

ScrvI'ct2.

(See footnote

*.)

(See

footnote

#.>

rotation pattern

md

additional

infomation.

(See

footnote

+.>

DATE

1

MILEAGE

SERVICED

-7-9

/&.Ob@

$Wjfl

la

yie$

:i;

{yyJ

000

;&@

-

-9

,

t'.

Ll

Change

engine

oil

and

filter (or every

3

months,

whichever occurs first).

0

Lubricate chassis components

(or

every

6

months,

whichever occurs first).

An

Emission Control

Service.

(See footnote

*.>

(See footnote

#.>

7-16

78

a

000

(130

000

k@-g)

0

Change engine oil

and

filter

(or

every

3

months, whichever occurs

first).

0

Lubricate chassis components

(or

every

6

months,

whichever occurs

first).

Rotate

tires. See

“Tire

Enspection

ad

Rotation” in the

Index

for proper

An

Emission

Control

Sewice.

(See footnote

*.)

(See

footnote

#.)

rotation pattern and additional infomation. (See footnote

+.)

DATE

1

MILEAGE

0

Change engine

oil

and

filter

(M

every

3

months, whichever

occurs

first).

An

Emission

Control

Service.

(See

footnote

*.>

Lubricate

chassis

components

(or

every

6

months,

whichever occurs

first).

(See

fo~tnote

#.>

Replace passenger compartment

air GEter.

Rotate

tires.

See

"Tire

Inspection and Rotation"

in

the

Index

for

proper

r~tati~n

pattern

and

additional

infomation.

(See

footnote

+.>

1

DATE

I

c!

G

Cl

Change engine

oil

and

filter

(or

every

3

months, whichever

occurs €irst).

An

Evp.~issi~n

Control

Senlice.

(See

foots,ote

*.)

Lubricate chassis components

(or

every

6

months,

whichever occurs

first).

(See footnote

#.)

Replace

air

cleaner

filter.

An

Emission

Cuntroi

Sewice.

Inspect fuel

tank,

cap

and

lines

for

damage or leaks. Inspect fuel

cap

gasket

for any damage. Replace

parts

as

needed.

An

EUZE’SS~Q~I

C~~ttd

Service.

(See footnote?.)

For

supercharged engines

only:

Check the supercharger

oil

level

and

add

oil

as

needed

(or

every

36

aonths,

whichever occurs

first).

See

“Recommended

Fluids

2cd

Lubricants”

in

this

section.

An

Emissiolz

Contrul

Sewice.

(See footnote?.)

Rotate

tires.

See “Tire Inspection

and

RQ~~~~QII”

in

the Index

for

proper

rotation

pattern and

additioaal

infomation.

(See

footnote

+.)

Change engine

oil

and filter (or every

3

months,

whichever occurs first).

0

Lubricate

chassis

components

(or

every

6

months,

whchever occurs first).

0

Replace passenger compartment

air

filter.

0

Rotate

tires.

See

“Tire Inspection

and

Rotation”

in

the

index for proper

An

Emission

Control

Sewice.

(See footnote

*.)

(See

footnote

#.)

rotation pattern

and

additional information. (See footnote

+.)

/flrCG’Gl.

QQ

&.GG

iL-6

w/f-;&-q

&

{

qpy

Q@;n

)&;:44

i

\.&.

d

Q-+

&Jk&

fi

0

Change engine

oil

and filter (or every

3

months,

whichever

occurs

kt).

An

Emission

Control

Sewice.

(See

footnote

*.)

(Continued)

DATE

k

SERVICED

BY

DATE

I

-

In

heavy

city

traffic

where the outside temperature regularly reaches

90

OF

(32

O

C)

Oh

higher.

?

The

U.S.

E~wironrnentd

Protection Agency

the

Cainiifomire

Air

R!csources

Board

has

determined that the

failure

to

pertc)rm

this

maintenance item will not nullify

the

emission

warranty

or

limit recall liability prior

to

the

completion

or‘

the

vehicle’s

useful

life. We, however,

urge

that

all

recommended maintenance services be

performed

at

the

indicated intervals and the maintenance

be recorded.

##

Lubricate the transaxle shift linkage, parking

brake

cable guides and the underbody contact points

and linkage.

*

If

your vehicle

has

m

Engice

Oil

Life

Monitor

(Index), the

monitor

will

show

you

when

to

change the

engine

oil

and

filter

--

usually

between

3,000

miles

(5

GOO

km>

and

7,500

miles

(X2

500

krn)

since your

last

oil

change. Under severe conditions. the indicator

may

come

on

before

3,008

miles

(5

8064

km).

Never drive

your

vehicle more

than

7,500

miles

(

12

500

km)

or

12

months

without

an

oil

and

filter change.

The system won’t detect

dust

in

the

oil.

So

if

yo2

drive

in

a

dusty

area,

be

sure

to change

your

oil.

and

filter

every

3,000

miles

(5

000

km)

~r

sooner

if

thms

CHANGE

OIL

message appears. Remember

to

reset the

Oil

Life

Monitor

when

the

oil

has

been changed.

For

more

information,

see

“Engine

Oil

Life

Monitor

(Index)”

in

the Index.

+-

A

good

time

to

check

your

brakes is

during

tire

rotation.

See

“Brake

System

Inspection” under “Periodic

Maintenance Inspections”

in

Part

C

of

this

schedule.

i

!

22*mo

Miles

(37

500

km)

(Contiaued)

L‘.l

Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection

and

Rotation”

in

the Index

for

proper

roeah’l

PagelTl

W’ld

Xh%tiOnd

hfQlXXlh‘L

(see

fSOblOte

+.>

j

~~~~~~

I

Change engine

oil

md

filter (or every

12

I-IIQ~~~S,

whichever

QCCUTS

first).

An

Emission Control Sewice.

(See footnote

*.)

(See footnote

#.)

U

Lubricate

chassis

components

(or

every

12

months,

whichever

QCCW

first).

U

Replace passenger compartment

air

filter.

CI

Rotate tires. See

“Tire

hs~>ectiopm

and

Rotation” in the Index for proper

0

Replace

air

cleaner

filter.

El

Inspect fuel tank,

cap

and

lines

for

damage or leaks. Inspect fuel

cap

gasket

rotation

pattern

and

additional

information. (See footnote

+.>

An Emission Control Sewice.

for

any

damage. Replace

parts

as needed.

An

Emission Control

Sewice.

(See footnote?.)

For

supercharged

engines

only: Check the supercharger

oil

level

ad

add

oil

as

needed

(or

every

36

montEns,

whichever occurs first).

See

“Reco~ended

lFluids

and

Lubricants” in

this

section.

An

Emission

Control

Service.

(See

footnote?.)

DATE

I

DATE

1

I

SERVICEDBY

I

MILEAGE

3

Change

engine

si1

and

filter

(or

every

12

months,

whichever

occurs

first).

0

Lubricate

chassis

components

(OF

every

I2

months,

whichever occurs

first).

c]

Rotate tires. See

“‘Fire

Inspection

and

Rotation”

in

the

Index

for

proper

An

Emission

Control

Sewice.

(See

fuotnste

*.)

(See

footnote

#.>

rotation

pattern

and

additional

information.

(See

footnote

+.)

DATE

I

E

DATE

t;

Replace

air

cleaner

filter.

An

Emission

Control

Service.

Inspect Euel tank, cap

md

lines

for

damage

or

Ieaks. Inspect €ael

cap

gasket

for

any damage. Replace

parts

as

needed.

An

Emission

Control

Service.

(See footnote?.)

For

supercharged

engines

only: Check

the

supercharger

oil

level

2nd

add

si1

as

needed

(or

every

36

months, whichever occurs first). See

“Recommended

Fluids

ad

Lubricants”

in

this section.

An

Emission

Control

Service.

(See footnote?.)

Rotate

tires.

See “Tire Inspection

and

Rotation”

in

the

Index

for

groper

rotation pattern and additional information.

(See

footnote

+.)

0

Change engine oil and filter

(or

every

12

months, whichever occurs

first).

An

Emissiort

Control

Service.

(See footnote

*,)

Lubricate

chassis

components

(or

every

12

IIIQE~~S,

whichever occurs

first).

(See footnote

#.)

Rotate

tires.

See

“Tire Inspection

and

Rotation” in

the

Index

for

proper

rotation pattern and

additisnai

information. (See footnote

+.>

DATE

I

Listed below are owner checks

and

services which

should

be performed

at

the

intervals specified

to

help

ensure

the safety, dependability

and

emission

contrd

perfsmance

of

your

vehicle.

Be sure any necessary

reDairs

are completed

at

once.

Whenever

any

fluids

or

lhx-icsnts

are

added

to

your

vehicle, make sure they are the proper

ones,

as

shown

in

3m

D.

Check

the

engiae

oil

level

and

add

the proper

oil

if

necessary.

See

“Engine

Oil”

in

the Index

for

further details.

Check the windshield

washer

fluid level

in

the

windshield washer

tank

and

add

the proper

fluid

If

necessary. See

“Windshield

Washer

Fluid”

in

the

Index

for

further

details.

Make

sure

tires

are inflated

to

the

correct pressures.

See “Tires”

in

the Index

~QF

further

detaiis.

Clean

casette

deck.

Cleaning

shouId

be

done

every

50

hours

of

tape

play.

See

“Audio

Systems”

in

the

Index for hrther

details.

Make sure the safety belt reminder Bight

and

all

your

belts, buckles,

Iatclr

plates, retractors

and

anchorages

are

working properly.

Eo~k

for

any other loose

damaged

safety

belt

systen

parts.

If

YOU

see

anything

that

might

keep

a

safety

belt system

from

doing

its

job,

have

it

repaired. Have any

tom

or

frayed

safety

belts replaced.

Also

look

for

any opened

OB

broken air bag coverings,

and

have them repaired

OF

replaced. (The air

bag

system

does not need regular maintenaxe.)

Inspect

wiper

blades

for

wex

or

cracking.

Replace

blade

inserts

that

appear

WQ~

or

damaged or

that

streak

or

miss

areas

of

the

wkndshiefc!.

Also

see “Wiper Blades,

Cleaning”

in

the

Endex.

Lubricate

all

body

door hinges.

Also

lubricate

all

hinges

and

latches,

including

those for

the

hood,

glove

box

door

and

console door.

Part

D

tells

you

what

to

use.

More

frequent lubrication may be required when

exposed

to

a

corrosive environment.

When

YOU

are

doing

this check, the vehicle

could

move suddenly.

If

it

does, you or others

could

be

injured. Follow the steps below.

1.

2.

3.

Before you start, be sure you have enoug’

I?

room

around

the

vehicle.

Firmly apply

both

the parking brake (see “Parking

Brake” in the

Index

if

necessary)

and

the regular brake.

NOTE:

Do

not

use

the accelerator pedal, and be

ready

to

turn

of€

the engine immediately if

it

starts.

Try

to

start

the engine

in

each gear.

The

starter

should

work only

in

PARK

(P)

or

NEUTRAL

(N).

If

the starter

works

in

any

other position,

your

vehicle needs service.

1.

2.

3.

Before you

start,

be

sure

yo3

have

CEQU~~

room

around

the

vehicle.

It

should

be

parked

on

a

Bevel surface.

FimBy

apply

the

parking

brake

(see

“Parking

Brice”

in

the

Index

if

necessary).

NOTE:

Be

ready

to

aqdy

the

regular

brake

immediately

if

the vehick

begins

to

move.

With

the engine

off,

turn

the key

to

the

RUN

position,

but

don’t

start

the

engine.

Without

applying the regular brake,

try

to

move

the shift

lever out

of

PARK

(P)

with

normal

effort.

X

the

shift lever moves

out

of

PARK

(P),

your

vehicle’s

BTSI needs service.

While

parked,

and with the parking brake

set,

try

to

turn

the ignition key

to

LOCK

In

each

shift lever position.

@

The

key

should

turn

to

LOCK

only when ;he

shift

lever

is

in

PARK

(P).

The key

should

come

out

only

in

LOCK.

Park

on

a

fairly

steep

hill,

with

the vehicle

facing

downhill.

Keeping your foot

QII

the regular

brake,

set

the

parking

brake.

@

To

check the

parking

brake's holding

ability:

With

the engine

running

and

tramaxle

in

NEUTRAL

(N),

slowiy

remove

foot

pressure from

the

reginlag

brake

pedal.

DQ

this

until

the

vehicle is held by the parking

brake

only.

Q

To

check

the

PARK

(PI

mechanism's

holding ability:

With the engine running,

shift

to

PARK

(P).

Then

release

ail

brakes.

Proper procedures

to

perfom

these

services

may

be

found

in

a

service manual. See ‘“Service

2nd

Owner

Publications”

in

the

Index.

USAGE

Engine

Oil

Hydraulic

Brake

System

Engine

8iI

with

the American

Petroleurn

Institute

Certified

FCX

Gasoline Engines

“St;t;$urst”

SYII-I~Q~

of

the

proper

viscosity.

To

determine

the

prefexed viscosity

for

your

vehicle’s engine,

see

“Engine

02’’

in

the

Index.

USAGE

Power

Steering

System

Key

Lock

Cylinders

Superchargsr

Chassis

Lubrication

Chassis

Lubricant

(GM

Bart

No.

12377985

or

equivalerzt)

or

lubricant meeting requireaents

of

NLGL

#

2,

Buick 1998 Park Avenue Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation